Kentrox Network Card AI232 User Manual
AI232  
32-Port High Speed Asynchronous Line Card  
User’s Guide  
Version 9.6x  
Part Number 232UM Rev 4  
© 2008 by Kentrox, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About this Document  
This document explains how to install, configure, and operate the AI232 32-port high speed  
asynchronous line card.  
You should have a working knowledge of the following:  
z
z
Your network  
TCP/IP and Asynchronous Protocols  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
About this Document: Document Conventions  
Document Conventions  
Table 1 describes the text conventions used in this document.  
Table 1 Document Conventions  
Convention  
Meaning  
Screen Text, Menu Items,  
System Prompts, Messages  
and Reports  
This style indicates configuration screen text, menu  
items, system prompts, messages, and reports.  
Static Command Text  
Variable Command Text  
...  
In a command statement, this style indicates text that  
should be entered exactly as shown at a command line.  
In a command statement, this style indicates  
user-specified text.  
In a command statement, ellipses (...) signify that the  
preceding parameter can be repeated a number of  
times.  
[ ]  
In a command statement, square brackets indicate an  
optional parameter. Two or more parameters in square  
brackets with a vertical bar ( | ) between them indicate a  
choice of optional parameters.  
[ | ]  
{ | }  
In a command statement, two or more parameters in  
braces with a vertical bar ( | ) between them indicate a  
choice of required parameters.  
Menus and Menu  
Commands  
This style indicates menu and menu commands. A  
vertical bar ( | ) separates the menus from the  
submenus or menu commands. The vertical bar also  
indicates the order in which you should click the menus,  
submenus, and menu commands.  
Dialog Boxes, Tabs,  
Fields, Check Boxes,  
and Command Buttons  
This style indicates dialog boxes, tabs, fields, check  
boxes, and command buttons.  
Variable Field Text  
This style indicates variable information you type in a  
dialog box field.  
KEYS  
Uppercase body text indicates keys on a keyboard,  
such as the TAB or ENTER keys. Keys used in  
combination are connected with a plus symbol (+).  
Labels  
This style designates physical components on Kentrox  
products such as jumpers, switches, and cable  
connectors.  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
About this Document: Document Conventions  
Table 1 Document Conventions (Continued)  
Convention  
Meaning  
Note messages emphasize or supplement important  
points of the main text.  
ꢀ
Note:  
Important:  
Important messages provide information that is  
essential to the completion of a task.  
Tip messages provide information that assists users in  
operating equipment more effectively.  
Tip:  
Caution messages indicate that failure to take a  
specified action could result in loss of data and/or harm  
to the software or hardware.  
CAUTION:  
Warning messages indicate that failure to take a  
specified action could result in physical harm to the  
user.  
WARNING:  
Laser danger messages indicate that failure to take a  
specified action could result in eye damage or  
blindness to the user due to overexposure to invisible  
laser radiation.  
LASER DANGER:  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
About this Document: Cautions and Warnings  
Cautions and Warnings  
Electrostatic Discharge Caution  
CAUTION: Kentrox equipment and its peripherals contain electrostatic sensitive  
components. Proper handling, shipping, and storage precautions must  
be exercised:  
z
You must remove and install cards in a static-free environment. Wear  
an antistatic wrist strap that is plugged into the Kentrox equipment so  
you are grounded at the same point as the equipment.  
z
z
z
z
Do not remove cards from their antistatic plastic bags until you are  
ready to install them into the chassis.  
Immediately after you remove a card from the chassis, you must  
insert it into its antistatic bag.  
When the cards are not in use, keep them in their antistatic plastic  
bags.  
Do not ship or store cards near strong electrostatic, electromagnetic,  
or radioactive fields.  
Ground Caution  
CAUTION: For Kentrox equipment to operate safely and correctly, there must be a  
safety ground strap between the equipment ground bolts and the office  
ground.  
Proper Cooling Caution  
ENSURE PROPER COOLING  
CAUTION: When AI232 is installed into an AI180 AIswitch series 180 chassis, the  
chassis must be equipped with the AIcool chassis cooling and Baffle-HS  
heat baffle with sensor assemblies.  
The AI180I AIswitch series 180 integrated chassis has a built-in fan and  
baffle assembly and does not require additional assemblies.  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
About this Document: Cautions and Warnings  
FCC Warning  
The Federal Communications Commission has set limits for emitted radio  
interference, and AI232 is constructed with this electromagnetic interference (EMI)  
limitation in mind. AI232 is classified under FCC regulations as a Class A device, that  
is, a device for use in commercial environments and not in residential areas. This  
device has been tested and shown to comply with the following FCC rule: Part 15  
Subpart J. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference to  
radio and TV reception, requiring the user to take whatever steps are necessary to  
correct the interference.  
Information is available from the FCC describing possible corrective actions. To  
maintain low EMI levels, we suggest that you use only metal connectors and shielded  
cable grounded to the frame.  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
About this Document: Customer Assistance  
Customer Assistance  
Kentrox offers technical support 24 hours a day, seven days a week.  
Before you contact Kentrox for assistance, please have the following information  
available:  
z
z
The type of hardware and software you are using  
The error number and exact wording of any messages that appeared on your  
screen  
z
z
What happened and what you were doing when the problem occurred  
How you tried to solve the problem  
Web Site Support  
Support is available 24 hours a day using our Web site at:  
http://www.kentrox.com  
Email Support  
Email support is available 24 hours a day. When you use email support, please be  
sure to include the details of your problem within the email.  
To contact Technical Support, send email to:  
[email protected]  
Phone Support  
Phone support is available. When you call Kentrox for support, please be sure you  
are at your computer and have the details of your problem available.  
To contact Technical Support, call (866) 480-3571.  
Kentrox Product Documentation  
To order documentation, please contact your sales representative at  
(800) 247-9482 or +1 (614) 798-2000.  
You can also access and view the most current versions of Kentrox product  
documentation on our Web site at:  
http://www.kentrox.com  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Chapter 1: Product Description ..............................................................1-1  
Features ....................................................................................................................... 1-2  
Break Propagation ............................................................................................ 1-2  
DCD/DSR/RTS/DTR Signal Lead Control ........................................................ 1-2  
Dynamic Port Configuration ............................................................................. 1-2  
IRB Connectivity ............................................................................................... 1-2  
LAN/WAN Connectivity .................................................................................... 1-2  
Modem Control ................................................................................................. 1-2  
Performance Monitoring, Maintenance, Troubleshooting ................................. 1-2  
SNMP Manageability ........................................................................................ 1-2  
Standalone Configuration ................................................................................. 1-3  
System Diagnostics .......................................................................................... 1-3  
AI232 Hardware Components ...................................................................................... 1-4  
Front Panel Components ................................................................................. 1-5  
Technical Specifications ............................................................................................... 1-6  
Distribution Panels ....................................................................................................... 1-7  
Model DP232-19/23 ......................................................................................... 1-7  
Model DP232-RJ45 .......................................................................................... 1-9  
Typical Applications ................................................................................................... 1-13  
Asynchronous to TCP/IP Application ............................................................. 1-13  
Modem Multiplexer Application ...................................................................... 1-14  
Chapter 2: Using the AI198 Menu System .............................................2-1  
Accessing the Menu System ........................................................................................ 2-2  
Navigating the Menu System ....................................................................................... 2-3  
Menu Numbering Structure .............................................................................. 2-3  
Types of Menu Items ........................................................................................ 2-3  
Exiting the Menu System ............................................................................................. 2-6  
Chapter 3: AI232 Local Menu System ....................................................3-1  
Identifying AI232 Menu System Security Options ........................................................ 3-2  
Multilevel User Name and Password Security ................................................. 3-2  
RADIUS Authentication .................................................................................... 3-2  
TACACS+ Authentication ................................................................................. 3-2  
PPP Authentication Protocols (PAP and CHAP) .............................................. 3-3  
TOC-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Logging Into AI232 ....................................................................................................... 3-4  
Using a Telnet Connection for Login ................................................................ 3-4  
Using an Asynchronous Port for Login ............................................................. 3-5  
Accessing the Local Menu System .............................................................................. 3-7  
Navigating the Local Menu System .............................................................................. 3-8  
Identifying Types of Menu Items ...................................................................... 3-8  
Accessing the Help Menu .......................................................................................... 3-10  
Exiting the Local Menu System .................................................................................. 3-11  
Chapter 4: System Configuration ...........................................................4-1  
General System Properties Configuration .................................................................... 4-2  
Destination Menu Break Sequence .................................................................. 4-2  
Ethernet Port Settings ...................................................................................... 4-4  
FTP Port ........................................................................................................... 4-5  
IP Settings ........................................................................................................ 4-6  
System Prompt ................................................................................................. 4-8  
TCP Settings .................................................................................................... 4-9  
Telnet Port ...................................................................................................... 4-10  
RADIUS Configuration ............................................................................................... 4-12  
Server Settings ............................................................................................... 4-12  
Shell/FTP Options .......................................................................................... 4-14  
TACACS+ Configuration ............................................................................................ 4-16  
Server Settings ............................................................................................... 4-16  
Shell/FTP Options .......................................................................................... 4-17  
SNMP Configuration .................................................................................................. 4-19  
Authentication Traps ...................................................................................... 4-19  
Community Names ......................................................................................... 4-20  
Contact Persons ............................................................................................. 4-22  
Node Information ............................................................................................ 4-22  
SNMP Manager .............................................................................................. 4-23  
Static Route Configuration ......................................................................................... 4-25  
IP Address Settings ........................................................................................ 4-25  
TID to Modem Mux Configuration .............................................................................. 4-26  
Inactivity Timeout ........................................................................................... 4-26  
Initialization String .......................................................................................... 4-27  
Port Bit Settings .............................................................................................. 4-28  
TID to Route ................................................................................................... 4-29  
Time Configuration ..................................................................................................... 4-31  
Daylight Savings Time .................................................................................... 4-31  
SNTP Settings ................................................................................................ 4-32  
Time Zone ...................................................................................................... 4-33  
TOC-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Chapter 5: Link Configuration ................................................................5-1  
AI232 Link Types ......................................................................................................... 5-2  
Asynchronous ................................................................................................... 5-2  
Asynchronous PPP .......................................................................................... 5-2  
Modem Multiplexer ........................................................................................... 5-3  
Connect Options Configuration .................................................................................... 5-4  
Alias .................................................................................................................. 5-4  
Call Retry Interval ............................................................................................. 5-5  
Connect String .................................................................................................. 5-6  
Connection Settings ......................................................................................... 5-8  
Link Application .............................................................................................. 5-10  
Disconnect Options Configuration .............................................................................. 5-12  
Disconnect Inactivity Timer Settings .............................................................. 5-12  
Disconnect Settings ........................................................................................ 5-14  
Disconnect String ........................................................................................... 5-15  
General Link Properties Configuration ....................................................................... 5-17  
Auto Disable Error Limit ................................................................................. 5-17  
Flow Control ................................................................................................... 5-18  
Link Description .............................................................................................. 5-19  
Link Number ................................................................................................... 5-20  
Link State ....................................................................................................... 5-21  
Link Type ........................................................................................................ 5-22  
Port Data Bits ................................................................................................. 5-23  
Port Parity ....................................................................................................... 5-24  
Port Speed ..................................................................................................... 5-25  
Port Stop Bits ................................................................................................. 5-27  
Xon Repeat Interval ........................................................................................ 5-28  
General PPP Properties Configuration ...................................................................... 5-30  
IPCP Address Settings ................................................................................... 5-30  
Maximum Unit Settings .................................................................................. 5-32  
Network Control Protocol ............................................................................... 5-33  
Modem Option Configuration ..................................................................................... 5-35  
Modem String ................................................................................................. 5-35  
Dialing Time-out Interval ................................................................................ 5-36  
Number of Dial Attempts ................................................................................ 5-37  
PPP Authentication Configuration .............................................................................. 5-39  
Local Authentication Settings ......................................................................... 5-39  
RAS Option .................................................................................................... 5-41  
Remote Authentication Settings ..................................................................... 5-43  
RTS/DTR Lead Control Configuration ........................................................................ 5-45  
DTR State Configuration ................................................................................ 5-45  
RTS State Configuration ................................................................................ 5-46  
TOC-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Chapter 6: TID Multiplexing ....................................................................6-1  
Overview ......................................................................................................................6-2  
TID Multiplexing Configuration ..................................................................................... 6-4  
Configuring the Parent Alias ............................................................................. 6-4  
Configuring the Children Aliases ...................................................................... 6-7  
Example Configurations ................................................................................. 6-10  
TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting ............................................................................... 6-15  
RTRV-HDR ..................................................................................................... 6-15  
Diagnostics for TID Multiplexing ..................................................................... 6-17  
Chapter 7: Alias and Call Routing Configuration ....................................7-1  
Overview ......................................................................................................................7-2  
Call Routing ..................................................................................................................7-4  
Configuring an Alias ......................................................................................... 7-4  
Source/Destination Protocol Tables ................................................................. 7-9  
Protocol Processing Modules ..................................................................................... 7-14  
Module Types ................................................................................................. 7-14  
Alias Macros ............................................................................................................... 7-19  
Alias Macro Components ............................................................................... 7-19  
Alias Macro Configuration .............................................................................. 7-24  
Chapter 8: AI232 Commands .................................................................8-1  
Commands Overview ................................................................................................... 8-2  
Shell Commands .............................................................................................. 8-2  
Shell Connections ............................................................................................ 8-2  
winslc Commands ............................................................................................ 8-3  
aaa account .................................................................................................................. 8-6  
aaa authen ................................................................................................................... 8-7  
aaa author ....................................................................................................................8-8  
aaa chpass ................................................................................................................... 8-9  
aaa fallback ................................................................................................................ 8-10  
aaa ppp authen .......................................................................................................... 8-11  
aaa profile .................................................................................................................. 8-12  
aaa retry ..................................................................................................................... 8-14  
aaa stats .....................................................................................................................8-15  
aaa summary ............................................................................................................. 8-17  
aaa timeout ................................................................................................................ 8-19  
alarm .......................................................................................................................... 8-20  
arp .............................................................................................................................. 8-24  
break .......................................................................................................................... 8-27  
creset ......................................................................................................................... 8-29  
date ............................................................................................................................ 8-30  
TOC-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
debug .........................................................................................................................8-31  
delete ......................................................................................................................... 8-33  
diag-conn ................................................................................................................... 8-34  
diag-eth ......................................................................................................................8-36  
diag-info .....................................................................................................................8-44  
diag-line ...................................................................................................................... 8-52  
diag-tconn .................................................................................................................. 8-55  
dir ............................................................................................................................... 8-56  
exit .............................................................................................................................. 8-57  
head ........................................................................................................................... 8-58  
help ............................................................................................................................ 8-59  
id ................................................................................................................................ 8-60  
ip ................................................................................................................................ 8-61  
ip init ........................................................................................................................... 8-62  
link .............................................................................................................................. 8-64  
log .............................................................................................................................. 8-66  
logout ......................................................................................................................... 8-67  
ls ................................................................................................................................. 8-68  
menu ..........................................................................................................................8-69  
modmux ..................................................................................................................... 8-70  
more ........................................................................................................................... 8-72  
panic ........................................................................................................................... 8-73  
passwd ....................................................................................................................... 8-74  
ping ............................................................................................................................ 8-75  
pppstatus .................................................................................................................... 8-76  
profile ......................................................................................................................... 8-78  
pvclist ......................................................................................................................... 8-80  
reset ........................................................................................................................... 8-82  
router .......................................................................................................................... 8-83  
selcnf .......................................................................................................................... 8-85  
sholog ......................................................................................................................... 8-86  
show ........................................................................................................................... 8-87  
staeia .......................................................................................................................... 8-89  
standalone .................................................................................................................. 8-91  
staslc .......................................................................................................................... 8-92  
syncflash .................................................................................................................... 8-94  
tacacs info .................................................................................................................. 8-95  
tacacs server .............................................................................................................. 8-96  
tacacs server ip .......................................................................................................... 8-97  
tacacs server phase ................................................................................................... 8-98  
tacacs server port ..................................................................................................... 8-100  
tacacs server secret ................................................................................................. 8-101  
TOC-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
tacacs server summary ............................................................................................ 8-102  
tacacs sholog ........................................................................................................... 8-104  
tacacs stats .............................................................................................................. 8-105  
tail ............................................................................................................................. 8-107  
tcpoutconn ................................................................................................................ 8-108  
telnet ........................................................................................................................8-109  
tftp ............................................................................................................................ 8-110  
tftpboot ..................................................................................................................... 8-112  
timezone ................................................................................................................... 8-114  
type ..........................................................................................................................8-116  
update ...................................................................................................................... 8-117  
uptime ...................................................................................................................... 8-118  
useradd .................................................................................................................... 8-119  
userdel ..................................................................................................................... 8-121  
users ........................................................................................................................ 8-122  
who ...........................................................................................................................8-123  
xon-interval ............................................................................................................... 8-124  
Appendix A: AI232 Crash Codes .......................................................... A-1  
Crash Codes ................................................................................................................A-2  
Common Crash Codes .....................................................................................A-2  
AI232 Crash Codes ..........................................................................................A-3  
System Failure Crash Reports .........................................................................A-4  
Kentrox Technical Support ...........................................................................................A-5  
Appendix B: Standalone Mode and Switch Mode ................................. B-1  
Standalone Mode .........................................................................................................B-2  
Downloading Software for a Standalone AI232 ................................................B-2  
Configuring BOOTP/TFTP ...............................................................................B-3  
Switch Mode .................................................................................................................B-4  
Downloading Software for AI232 in Switch Mode ............................................B-4  
Appendix C: Commands for AI232 TACACS+ Server Enhancements .. C-1  
AI232 Commands ........................................................................................................C-2  
AI232 Menu Aliases .....................................................................................................C-3  
FTP Sessions ...............................................................................................................C-4  
TOC-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Product Description  
This chapter provides an overview of the AI232 32-port high speed asynchronous line card.  
Guide to this Chapter  
Features  
AI232 Hardware Components  
Technical Specifications  
Distribution Panels  
Typical Applications  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Features  
Features  
AI232 is a high-performance asynchronous network interface card used in an  
AIswitch. AI232 includes the following features:  
Break Propagation  
AI232 supports break handling from one end of a connection to another end  
regardless of the protocols used for data transport. Refer to Chapter 7: Alias and Call  
Routing Configuration for details about available types of break handling.  
DCD/DSR/RTS/DTR Signal Lead Control  
AI232 supports user selectable disconnect on DCD low, DCD high-to-low transition,  
DSR low, and DSR high-to-low transition. Additionally, AI232 allows for user  
selectable connection control of DTR/RTS.  
Dynamic Port Configuration  
AI232 allows for configuration changes on a per port basis without resetting the card.  
IRB Connectivity  
AI232 communicates with other cards in the same chassis over an internal repeater  
bus. It cannot communicate over the backplane with line cards that do not use the  
IRB.  
LAN/WAN Connectivity  
AI232 supports communications with other TCP/IP devices in a LAN/WAN  
environment.  
Modem Control  
AI232 provides full modem control and is configurable for auto-answer or dial-modem  
modes.  
Performance Monitoring, Maintenance, Troubleshooting  
Shell and winslc commands let users handle performance monitoring, maintenance,  
and troubleshooting for AI232.  
SNMP Manageability  
AI232 supports configuration using SNMP as well as monitoring. SNMP traps are  
generated by AI232 and are sent to all the management stations that exist in the trap  
table.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Features  
Standalone Configuration  
AI232 operates as a standalone card when it is installed in the AIswitch series 110  
chassis. Standalone mode lets AI232 function without dependence on AI198 for  
configuration and management. Refer to Appendix B: Standalone Mode and Switch  
Mode for more details.  
System Diagnostics  
AI232 lets users view diagnostic data on existing connections and internal information  
about serial links. For more information about viewing system diagnostics, refer to  
sections:  
z
z
z
z
z
diag-conn on page 8-34  
diag-eth on page 8-36  
diag-info on page 8-44  
diag-line on page 8-52  
diag-tconn on page 8-55.  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Product Description: AI232 Hardware Components  
AI232 Hardware Components  
AI232 has four high-density connectors that provide 32 EIA-232-E asynchronous  
ports that support speeds up to and including 115 Kilobits per second. All ports have  
modem control for host or modem applications and can be used to connect user  
terminals, personal computers, modems, and other high-speed asynchronous ports.  
AI232 can also be used as a high-speed terminal server that handles asynchronous  
to TCP/IP conversions. A distribution panel is required to serve as a physical interface  
for AI232.  
CAUTION: AIswitch and its peripherals contain electrostatic sensitive components.  
Exercise proper handling, shipping, and storage precautions.  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Product Description: AI232 Hardware Components  
Front Panel Components  
Figure 1-1 displays the AI232 front panel components.  
DC OK LED  
Illuminates green when +5 Volts is  
present.  
FAULT LED  
Illuminates red if the card fails.  
DC OK  
FAULT  
PORTS 25-32 Connector Connects ports 25 to 32 to the  
distribution panel.  
PORTS 17-24 Connector Connects ports 17 to 24 to the  
PORTS  
25-32  
distribution panel.  
PORTS 9-16 Connector  
PORTS 1-8 Connector  
ACT LED  
Connects ports 9 to 16 to the distribution  
panel.  
Connects ports 1 to 8 to the distribution  
panel.  
PORTS  
17-24  
Illuminates green when the card is  
transmitting or receiving packets.  
LINK LED  
Illuminates green when valid link  
integrity pulses are being received.  
PORTS  
9-16  
COL LED  
Illuminates red when collisions are  
detected.  
10BASET Connector  
Specifies the external 10BaseT port  
connector.  
PORTS  
1-8  
10  
B
A
S
E
T
AI232  
Figure 1-1  
AI232  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Technical Specifications  
Technical Specifications  
Table 1-1 lists the AI232 technical specifications.  
Table 1-1 Technical Specifications  
Description  
Ethernet port on the AI232 front panel.  
Component  
10BaseT  
High Density SCSI 32 asynchronous, EIA-232-E (individual ports are accessed  
by using a distribution panel)  
Port Speed  
Installation  
Current Draw  
Compliance  
300 bps to 115 Kbps  
Requires one slot in an AIswitch (can be hot swapped)  
2.0 A, maximum  
For use with AI UL listed AIswitch Series Chassis  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Distribution Panels  
Distribution Panels  
Distribution panels provide a physical interface for AI232. The following distribution  
panel models and interfaces are available:  
z
z
Model DP232-19/23 (16 DB-25/EIA-232-E interfaces)  
Model DP232-RJ45 (32 RJ-45/EIA-232-E interfaces)  
Model DP232-19/23  
This distribution panel provides 16 DB-25/EIA-232-E interfaces for AI232. To access  
all 32 ports on AI232, two distribution panels are required. The distribution panel is  
available in two sizes for 19-inch or 23-inch rack installations. Figure 1-2 displays the  
distribution panel and Table 1-2 lists the specifications.  
Connect to Network Elements  
(16 ports)  
Connect to the AI232  
PORT 1/17  
PORT 2/18  
PORT 5/21  
PORT 9/25  
PORT 13/29  
PORT 14/30  
PORT 6/22  
PORT 10/26  
PORT 3/19  
PORT 4/20  
PORT 7/23  
PORT 8/24  
PORT 11/27  
PORT 12/28  
PORT 15/31  
PORT 16/32  
PORTS  
1 - 8  
PORTS  
9 - 16  
DP232  
APPLIED INNOVATION INC.  
COPYRIGHT 1999  
Figure 1-2 DP232-19/23 Distribution Panel  
Table 1-2 Specifications for DP232-19/23  
Description  
Specification  
Mounting  
DP232-19: mounts to a 19-inch rack  
DP232-23: mounts to a 23-inch rack  
I/O Ports  
16 DB-25/EIA-232-E interfaces  
Weight (approximately) 2.5 lb (1.12 kg)  
Size Height: 4 in. (10.16 cm)  
Width: 19 in. (48.26 cm)/23 in. (58.42 cm)  
Depth: 1.12 in. (2.84 cm)  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Distribution Panels  
Table 1-2 Specifications for DP232-19/23 (Continued)  
Description  
Specification  
Pin Assignments  
Pin  
2
Signal  
TXD  
RXD  
RTS  
CTS  
DSR  
Pin 1  
Pin 14  
Pin 25  
3
4
5
6
Pin 13  
7
Signal  
GND  
8
DCD  
Cables  
z
z
CAB467: Connects one connector (8 ports) on the  
AI232 to the distribution panel. Each distribution  
panel requires two cables.  
CAB469: Connects network elements to the  
individual connectors on the distribution panel.  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Distribution Panels  
Installation Procedure  
1. Install the distribution panel(s) on the rack. Figure 1-3 on page 1-9 displays a  
typical installation.  
2. Attach cables from AI232 to the distribution panel.  
DP232-19/23  
Cable: CAB467  
PORT  
PORT  
1
2
PORT  
5
PORT  
9
PORT 13  
PORT 14  
(4 places)  
PORT  
6
PORT 10  
PORT  
PORT  
3
4
PORT  
PORT  
7
8
PORT 11  
PORT 12  
PORT 15  
PORT 16  
PORTS  
PORTS  
16  
1
-
8
9
-
PORT  
PORT  
1
2
PORT  
PORT  
5
6
PORT  
9
PORT 13  
PORT 14  
PORT 10  
PORT  
PORT  
3
4
PORT  
PORT  
7
8
PORT 11  
PORT 12  
PORT 15  
PORT 16  
PORTS  
PORTS  
16  
1
-
8
9
-
-
-
AI232  
(AI180 Chassis)  
Figure 1-3 Typical Installation  
Model DP232-RJ45  
This model provides 32 RJ-45/EIA-232-E interfaces for AI232. Reversible mounting  
flanges allow for installation to a 19-inch or 23-inch rack. Figure 1-4 displays the  
distribution panel and Table 1-3 lists the specifications.  
Connect to Network Elements  
Connect to the AI232  
(4 places)  
(32 ports)  
1
4
5
8
9
12  
13  
16  
PORTS 1 - 8  
PORTS 9 - 16  
PORTS 25 - 32  
DP232-RJ45  
24 25  
WWW.AIINET.COM  
PORTS 17 - 24  
17  
20  
21  
28  
29  
32  
Figure 1-4 DP232-RJ45 Distribution Panel  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Distribution Panels  
Table 1-3 Specifications for DP232-RJ45  
Description  
Specification  
Mounting  
I/O Ports  
Mounts to a 19-inch or 23-inch rack  
32 RJ-45 ports  
Weight (approximately) 4.8 lb (2.16 kg)  
Size  
Height: 2 in. (5.08 cm)  
Width: 16.9 in. (42.92 cm) without mounting flanges  
Depth: 3.5 in. (8.89 cm)  
Pin Assignments  
Pin 1  
Pin 8  
Pin  
1
Signal  
RTS  
DTR  
TXD  
DCD  
RXD  
GND  
DSR  
CTS  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Cables  
CAB467—Connects one connector (8 ports) on the  
AI232 to the distribution panel. The distribution panel  
requires four cables.  
CAB513—An RJ45 to DB25 null cable that connects  
network elements to the individual connectors on the  
distribution panel (straight through applications).  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Distribution Panels  
Installation Procedure  
1. Attach the mounting flanges and tie bar as shown in Figure 1-5. (Table 1-4 shows  
the part list.)  
2. Install the distribution panel to the rack. Figure 1-6 shows a typical installation.  
1
4
5
8
9
12  
13  
16  
PORTS 1 - 8  
PORTS 9 - 16  
PORTS 25 - 32  
DP232-RJ45  
24 25  
WWW.AIINET.COM  
PORTS 17 - 24  
17  
20  
21  
28  
29  
32  
Setting flanges for a 19-inch rack  
Setting flanges for a 23-inch rack  
Install the mounting flanges in  
the desired location  
Install the mounting flanges in  
the desired location  
4
4
5
5
1
1
3
3
Figure 1-5 DP232-RJ45 Distribution Panel  
Table 1-4 Parts List  
Part No.  
Item Description  
Quantity  
1
2
3
4
5
Tie Bar  
06-410-002  
1
1
1
6
2
Mounting Flange (left side)  
Mounting Flange (right side)  
#6-32 Screw with lockwasher  
#12-24 Screw with lockwasher  
06-110-003  
06-110-005  
00-018-001  
00-015-003  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Distribution Panels  
Cable: CAB467  
(4 places)  
DP232-RJ45  
1
4
5
8
9
12  
28  
13  
29  
16  
32  
PORTS 1  
-
-
8
PORTS 9 16  
-
WWW.AIINET.COM  
DP232-RJ45  
24 25  
PORTS 17  
24  
PORTS 25 32  
-
17  
20  
21  
-
-
AI232  
(AI180 Chassis)  
Figure 1-6 Typical Installation  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Typical Applications  
Typical Applications  
AI232 is used primarily for connecting to asynchronous network elements and  
modems. The following applications are discussed in this section:  
z
z
Asynchronous to TCP/IP Application  
Modem Multiplexer Application  
Asynchronous to TCP/IP Application  
Figure 1-7 illustrates an asynchronous to TCP/IP application.  
Asynchronous  
NE  
AI  
TCP/IP  
Ethernet  
2
Asynchronous  
3
Operational  
Support System  
NE  
2
Asynchronous  
NE  
Figure 1-7 Asynchronous to TCP/IP Application  
The following events occur in Figure 1-7:  
z
z
The OSS sends TCP/IP calls to AI232.  
AI232 routes the TCP/IP calls to an asynchronous NE using an asynchronous  
port.  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Product Description: Typical Applications  
Modem Multiplexer Application  
Figure 1-8 illustrates a modem multiplexer application.  
Modem  
Modem  
Modem  
AI  
2
TCP/IP  
3
2
Serial  
Links  
Operational  
Support System  
Ethernet  
NE  
NE  
NE  
Modem  
Packet Switched  
Telephone Network  
Modem  
Modem  
Figure 1-8 Modem Multiplexer Application  
The following events occur in Figure 1-8:  
z
z
The OSS sends a TCP/IP call to AI232.  
AI232 routes the TCP/IP call over a serial link to one of several available modems  
in a modem pool. When a call comes in that requires a modem, one is selected  
from the pool and dials out appropriately. For information on configuring the  
modem pool and modem selection for incoming calls, refer to the Modem Mux  
configuration menu.  
ꢀ
Note: Round-robin dialing has been incorporated for ModMux links to balance  
the demand placed on available modems by incoming calls. Rather than  
always starting at the first available modem, the ModMux driver rotates  
through all available modems so that the first available one is not always  
the first to be dialed.  
z
z
The modem routes the call through the PSTN (packet switched telephone  
network) to a remote modem.  
The remote modem sends the call to an NE.  
1-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
Using the AI198 Menu System  
This chapter provides information on starting, ending, and navigating through an AI198 menu  
system session.  
Guide to this Chapter  
Accessing the Menu System  
Navigating the Menu System  
Exiting the Menu System  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Using the AI198 Menu System: Accessing the Menu System  
Accessing the Menu System  
To access the AI198 menu system:  
1. Log into AI198.  
2. At the prompt, enter menu. The Main Menu appears.  
>menu  
Main Menu  
01+Configure options affecting the system as a whole  
02+Create, delete, or modify a destination name  
03+Display all destination names  
04+Configure cards  
05+Set or remove connection restrictions based on port numbers  
06+Display all connection restrictions  
07+Configure slot density  
08+Configure the alias translation table  
09+Display the list of alias translation entries  
10+Configure the BOOTP table  
21 Exit the configuration menu system  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Using the AI198 Menu System: Navigating the Menu System  
Navigating the Menu System  
Menu Numbering Structure  
All menus accessed from the Main Menu are identified with a numerical reference at  
the top right corner of the menu screen. This numerical reference specifies the  
location within the menu system. Each digit in the menu number represents a menu  
item that was previously selected. For example, Menu 4.2 indicates that menu item 4  
and 2 were selected.  
>2  
Menu 4.2  
01 Configure as Empty Slot  
02+Configure as AI183/AI185 standard 4/16 port card  
03+Configure as AI193/194 Ethernet card with slot expansion of-----  
04+Configure as AI192/196 X.25 network card with slot expansion of--------  
05+Configure as ASP or Advanced Smart Line Card with slot expansion of--------  
06 Configure as AI196-I network card with LocalView  
07 Configure as AI2524 Router card  
08 Configure as AI294 Ethernet Switch card  
09+Configure as AI196-I network interface card with menu support  
10 Configure as Independent Smart Line Card  
11+Configure as AI296 network interface card  
12+Configure as AI192/196 with full menu support and slot expansion of--------  
13+Configure as AI285 network interface card  
14+Configure as AI232 network interface card  
15 Configure as AI Modem  
16 Configure as AIFlex Fiber LAN Extender Card  
17 Configure as AI120 Card  
18 Configure as AIE1 Card  
19 Configure as AITC Card  
20 Next Page  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
Types of Menu Items  
The following four types of menu items are available:  
z
z
z
z
Submenus  
Toggles  
Data  
Functions  
Submenus  
Submenus go to deeper levels in the menu hierarchy. They provide additional  
configuration menus. Menu items that contain submenus have a plus sign (+) next to  
their menu item number. In this example, menu item 02 will display a submenu.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Using the AI198 Menu System: Navigating the Menu System  
02+Configure as AI232 network interface card  
Some submenus require a selection from a list and then re-display the previous menu  
showing the selection. Other submenus have their own submenus that request  
additional information. After saving the entries, the top-level menu re-appears.  
Toggles  
Toggles display two or more values that can be selected for a parameter. Toggles  
have an asterisk (*) next to their menu item number. Entering the menu item number  
toggles to the next selection.  
In this example, menu items 06 and 07 are toggles.  
06*TCP Default Window Size (200, 512, 1024, 2048)-------------------------- 200  
07*TCP Send Ahead-----------------------------------------------------------OFF  
For 06*TCP Default Window Size, the user can toggle between values 200, 512, 1024, and  
2048. For 07*TCP Send Ahead, the user can toggle between ON and OFF.  
Data  
Data menu items request text entries (such as destination names and card  
descriptions) or numeric values (such as port numbers and IP addresses). To enter  
information in a data menu item, enter the menu item number followed by a comma  
(or a space) and the configuration information.  
In this example, the menu item requires an IP address entry.  
01 IP Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254)-----------------------000.000.000.000  
To enter an IP address of 172.016.002.043, enter the following:  
1,172.016.002.043  
The menu re-appears with the entered IP address.  
01 IP Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254)-----------------------172.016.002.043  
To change configuration data that has been entered for a menu item, enter the menu  
item number followed by a comma and the new data.  
Tip: To change a typed entry, use BACKSPACE to back up to the desired position in  
the text and retype the changes. However, once the user presses ENTER,  
changes can be made only by selecting that menu item and re-entering the  
data.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Using the AI198 Menu System: Navigating the Menu System  
Functions  
Menu item functions appear at the bottom of each menu. This example displays menu  
items that can appear and Table 2-1 describes them.  
17 Display first page  
18 Next page  
19 Delete entry  
20 Save the changes made  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
Table 2-1 Menu Item Descriptions  
Menu Item Description  
17  
18  
19  
20  
Displays the first page of a menu.  
Displays additional pages of a menu.  
Deletes information for a specified entry.  
Saves the entered information and re-displays the previous related  
menu.  
Important: Configuration entries take effect only after every screen  
has been saved going back to the main menu.  
21  
Exits a menu without saving changes. All items on the menu return to  
the previously configured values.  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Using the AI198 Menu System: Exiting the Menu System  
Exiting the Menu System  
To exit the menu system:  
1. Access the Main Menu.  
2. Enter 21. The command prompt appears.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
AI232 Local Menu System  
This chapter provides information on the configuration and navigation of the AI232 menu system.  
This system offers on-board configuration capabilities similar to those available in the AI198  
menu system. The AI232 menu system is available when the card is operating in both switch  
mode and standalone mode.  
Guide to this Chapter  
Identifying AI232 Menu System Security Options  
Logging Into AI232  
Accessing the Local Menu System  
Navigating the Local Menu System  
Accessing the Help Menu  
Exiting the Local Menu System  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Local Menu System: Identifying AI232 Menu System Security Options  
Identifying AI232 Menu System Security Options  
AI232 has a variety of security options, including:  
z
z
z
z
Multilevel User Name and Password Security  
RADIUS Authentication  
TACACS+ Authentication  
PPP Authentication Protocols (PAP and CHAP)  
Multilevel User Name and Password Security  
Up to 10 configurable user account profiles can be assigned to an AI232 user. Five  
system profiles are available for providing various levels of user access. For more  
information about user profiles, refer to command profile on page 1-103.  
RADIUS Authentication  
RADIUS authentication verifies user login information against valid user information in  
a database on a centralized RADIUS authentication server. A primary and secondary  
RADIUS server are configurable to provide secure access for an entire AI232  
network. AI232 RADIUS authentication is available for Telnet, asynchronous, and  
synchronous ports. For more information on RADIUS authentication, refer to section  
RADIUS Configuration on page 1-19.  
TACACS+ Authentication  
TACACS+ authentication verifies user login information against the user’s permission  
level on a TACACS+ server. Up to 9 TACACS+ servers are configurable to provide  
secure access for an entire AI232 network. AI232 TACACS+ authentication is  
available for Telnet, asynchronous, and FTP connections. For more information on  
TACACS+ authentication and server configuration, refer to the following commands:  
z
z
z
z
z
aaa authen on page 8-7  
aaa author on page 8-8  
aaa fallback on page 8-10  
aaa timeout on page 8-19  
aaa ppp authen on page 8-11  
z
z
z
z
z
tacacs server on page 8-96  
tacacs server phase on page 8-98  
tacacs server ip on page 8-97  
tacacs server port on page 8-100  
tacacs server secret on page 8-101  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Local Menu System: Identifying AI232 Menu System Security Options  
PPP Authentication Protocols (PAP and CHAP)  
All asynchronous and synchronous PPP links are configurable to use either PAP or  
CHAP PPP authentication protocols. PAP establishes peer identity using a 2-way  
handshake that is done only upon initial link establishment. CHAP performs a 3-way  
handshake upon initial link establishment, then proceeds to verify the link with 3-way  
handshakes at random intervals. CHAP also encrypts the user’s password over the  
PPP link to provide added security.  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Local Menu System: Logging Into AI232  
Logging Into AI232  
Log into AI232 with a Telnet connection or with any of AI232’s asynchronous ports  
that are configured as Login ports.  
ꢀ
Note: ai is the default user ID and password. AI232 prompts you to create a new  
user ID and password after the fifth login with the default values. Refer to  
command useradd on page 8-119 to create a new user ID and password.  
Using a Telnet Connection for Login  
Logging in using a Telnet connection requires that AI232 has a configured IP address.  
If an IP address has not been configured, refer to Chapter 4: System Configuration to  
assign an IP address.  
To log into AI232 using a Telnet connection:  
1. Power on AI232.  
2. Connect the Ethernet network connection to the 10BaseT port on the front panel  
of AI232.  
3. Telnet to AI232. The login prompt appears.  
ꢀ
Note: ai is the default user ID and password. There are five grace period logins.  
If after the fifth login a new ID and password have not been created, AI232  
prompts you to create a user ID and password. Use the useradd  
command described in Chapter 8: AI232 Commands to create a user ID  
and password.  
4. Enter your user ID. The password prompt appears.  
5. Enter your password. The destination menu appears. You are now logged into  
AI232.  
The following message appears when AI232 is configured to contact a TACACS+  
server during authentication:  
login: test  
Password:  
Contacting TACACS+ server. Please wait.  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Local Menu System: Logging Into AI232  
The following message appears when AI232 is configured to contact a TACACS+  
server during authentication, but the contact attempt fails:  
login: test  
Password:  
Contacting TACACS+ server. Please wait.  
TACACS+ server(s) not responding.  
ꢀ
Note: Five consecutive failed login attempts generate an SNMP trap and a log  
message saying that the login failed. Also, an entry appears in the log file with  
text stating Warning: xconsecutive failed login attemptswhere xis the number  
of consecutive failed login attempts.  
Using an Asynchronous Port for Login  
Two tools are required for logging into AI232 using an asynchronous port:  
z
A PC with terminal emulation software such as HyperTerminal (included with  
Windows 95/98/2000/XP) or ProComm.  
z
Terminal cable with these specifications: null (RS232) cable with DB25 male  
connector for AI232 distribution panel connection and appropriate connector for  
your PC.  
To log into AI232 using an asynchronous port:  
1. Set the terminal emulation software to the following settings:  
z
z
z
z
9600 baud  
No parity  
Eight data bits  
One stop bit  
2. Power on AI232.  
3. Connect a PC to port 1 on the DP232 distribution panel.  
ꢀ
Note: Link 1 on AI232 is enabled and configured for login by default, which  
allows access through the link. AI232 may also be accessed through any  
asynchronous link that is enabled and configured for login.  
4. Press ENTER. The login prompt appears.  
5. Enter your user ID. The password prompt appears.  
6. Enter your password. The destination menu appears. You are now logged into  
AI232.  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Local Menu System: Logging Into AI232  
The following message appears when AI232 is configured to contact a TACACS+  
server during authentication:  
login: test  
Password:  
Contacting TACACS+ server. Please wait.  
The following message appears when AI232 is configured to contact a TACACS+  
server during authentication, but the contact attempt fails:  
login: test  
Password:  
Contacting TACACS+ server. Please wait.  
TACACS+ server(s) not responding.  
ꢀ
Note: Five consecutive failed login attempts generate an SNMP trap and a log  
message saying that login failed. Also, a new entry will appear in the log  
file with text stating Warning: x consecutive failed login attemptswhere xis  
the number of consecutive failed login attempts.  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Local Menu System: Accessing the Local Menu System  
Accessing the Local Menu System  
To access the AI232 menu session:  
1. Log into AI232. Refer to section Logging Into AI232 on page 3-4 for more  
information.  
2. At the destination menu, enter ai. The AI232 shell prompt appears.  
3. Enter menu. The AI232 Main Menu appears.  
AI232 Main Menu  
+ Link Menu  
+ Alias Menu  
+ System Menu  
+ Static Route Menu  
....................................................................  
:
:
: Select the desired menu option using the UP or DOWN arrow key. :  
: Then press ENTER or RETURN to continue.  
:..................................................................:  
:
<F1> Help  
<F4> Close  
ꢀ
Note: The Alias Menu is only available when you log into AI232 in standalone mode.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Local Menu System: Navigating the Local Menu System  
Navigating the Local Menu System  
Arrow keys and keyboard short cuts can be used to navigate through the local menu  
system. Refer to Table 3-1 for a list of arrow key movements and keyboard shortcuts.  
ꢀ
Note: To use the arrow keys in the menu system, make sure the VT100 arrow keys  
are enabled in either your Telnet settings or your terminal emulation program.  
Table 3-1 Direction Keys  
Direction Keys  
Up  
Use the up arrow key or Press <Ctrl-p>  
Use the down arrow key or Press <Ctrl-n>  
Use the right arrow key or Press <Ctrl-f>  
Use the left arrow key or Press <Ctrl-b>  
Down  
Right  
Left  
Identifying Types of Menu Items  
The AI232 local menu system contains data items that let you input information or  
toggle between available selections.  
Data Entry Items  
The following screen shot displays an example of a data entry menu item:  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1
To enter information for a data entry menu item:  
1. Move the cursor to the menu item.  
ꢀ
Note: If the selected menu item has a range of valid values, that range will  
appear in the bottom right of the screen.  
2. Enter your data.  
To erase existing data for a data entry menu item:  
1. Move the cursor to the menu item.  
2. Delete the data using BACKSPACE or DELETE and press ENTER.  
OR  
Enter new data.  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Local Menu System: Navigating the Local Menu System  
To save your changes:  
z
z
Press F2 (or use the up and down arrow keys to highlight [Send]) and ENTER.  
Enter yto save. If an error message appears, check your work and make changes  
as necessary.  
z
Press CTRL-E to save data entries immediately without being queried to save. If  
an error message appears, check your work and make changes as necessary.  
Toggle Items  
The following screen shot displays an example of a toggle menu item. The selected  
option has brackets around it.  
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Up]  
Down  
To select a value for a toggle menu item:  
1. Move the cursor to the menu item.  
2. Highlight the option you want to select and press ENTER. The brackets move to  
that option.  
To save your changes:  
z
z
Press F2 (or use the up and down arrow keys to highlight [Send]) and ENTER.  
Enter yto save. If an error message appears, check your work and make changes  
as necessary.  
z
Press CTRL-E to save data entries immediately without being queried to save. If  
an error message appears, check your work and make changes as necessary.  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Local Menu System: Accessing the Help Menu  
Accessing the Help Menu  
The AI232 help menu lists all available keyboard codes and function keys with their  
associated purposes. The help menu can be accessed by doing one of the following  
things:  
z
z
z
Pressing F1 and ENTER  
Selecting Help on the menu and ENTER  
Pressing ESC-1 and ENTER.  
The following example displays the first page of the local menu system help screen:  
Navigation Help  
Page 1 of 4  
This screen displays when you press the <F1> key or if you enter an invalid key-  
stroke from the Main Menu. The following keyboard function keys are programmed  
to allow you to enter or change data in menus:  
<F1>; <F2>; <F4>; UP Arrow; DOWN Arrow; LEFT Arrow; RIGHT Arrow  
If you can not locate these keys on your keyboard, use the following keyboard  
equivalent codes to provide the same functionality:  
Keyboard Code Function Key  
Purpose  
Esc 1  
Esc 2  
<F1>  
<F2>  
HELP - displays this help screen from any menu.  
SEND - transmits the currently displayed data. You  
are given a confirmation prompt before the actual  
transmittal of data occurs. When you press the <F2>  
key, the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys can then be used  
to access the other commands.  
Press SPACE BAR to continue, or 'q' to quit  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Local Menu System: Exiting the Local Menu System  
Exiting the Local Menu System  
To exit the local menu system and save all changes:  
1. Select <F2> Send and press ENTER.  
The following prompt appears:  
Save changes? (y/n)  
2. Save the changes:  
y
3. Select <F4> Close and press ENTER until you are out of the menu system.  
To exit the local menu system without saving changes, execute step 3.  
ꢀ
Note: Entering <CTRL> + Rtakes you directly to the main menu.  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Local Menu System: Exiting the Local Menu System  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
System Configuration  
This chapter provides information on configuring AI232 system settings with the AI198 menu  
system and the AI232 local menu system. To configure AI232 with the AI198 menu system, the  
AI198 software must be at version 1.90 or later. The AI198 menu system settings take effect only  
when AI232 is operating in switch mode (non-standalone mode).  
Guide to this Chapter  
General System Properties Configuration  
RADIUS Configuration  
TACACS+ Configuration  
SNMP Configuration  
Static Route Configuration  
TID to Modem Mux Configuration  
Time Configuration  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration  
General System Properties Configuration  
General system properties are configurable at the first level of the AI198 and AI232  
System menu. The following menu items can be configured:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Destination Menu Break Sequence  
Ethernet Port Settings  
FTP Port  
IP Settings  
System Prompt  
TCP Settings  
Telnet Port  
Destination Menu Break Sequence  
Description  
This menu item sets the character sequence that lets the user exit a connection from  
the destination menu.  
Format  
Destination menu break sequences take the following format:  
attention_keystroke [ delay_start, delay_end ] next_character  
attention_keystroke  
Defines the keystroke that indicates that a break  
sequence is coming. Valid values are:  
z <x>where xrepresents the decimal ASCII value  
of the keystroke. For example, enter <9>to  
represent the TAB key.  
z <c>xwhere <c>represents the CTRL key and x  
represents the actual key name. For example,  
enter <c>^to represent CTRL+SHIFT+6.  
z <c><x>where <c>represents the CTRL key and  
xrepresents the decimal ASCII value of the  
actual key name. For example, enter <c><9>to  
represent CTRL+TAB.  
delay_start  
Defines the amount of time (in seconds) you must  
wait before entering the next character. Valid values  
are integers from 0 to 8.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration  
delay_end  
Defines the amount of time (in seconds) before which  
you must enter the next character. Valid values are  
integers from 1 to 9.  
ꢀ
Note: If you do not enter the next character within  
the configured time frame, then both the  
attention_keystrokeand next_character  
values are treated as data and forwarded.  
next_character  
Defines the next character in the sequence. Valid  
values are:  
z <x>where xrepresents the decimal ASCII value  
of the keystroke. For example, enter <9>to  
represent the TAB key.  
z <c>xwhere <c>represents the CTRL key and x  
represents the actual key name. For example,  
enter <c>^to represent CTRL+SHIFT+6.  
z <c><x>where <c>represents the CTRL key and  
xrepresents the decimal ASCII value of the  
actual key name. For example, enter <c><9>to  
represent CTRL+TAB.  
ꢀ
Note: You can include multiple characters with delays between each in the break  
sequence. For example, <c>^[1,5]x[0,9]k is a valid entry.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14 pg 2.  
2. From Menu 4.2.14 pg 2, enter 3,and the desired destination menu break  
sequence. The maximum length is 44 characters. The default is <c>^[1,5]x.  
This example displays item 03 Destination Menu Break Sequence configured as  
<c>^[2,6]x.  
>3,<c>^[2,6]x  
Menu 4.2.14 pg 2  
01*10 Base T Ethernet-------------------------------------------------------OFF  
02+Radius Configuration Menu  
03 Destination Menu Break Sequence-----------------------------------<c>^[2,6]x  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the System Menu.  
2. Enter a character sequence for Destination Menu Break Sequence. Maximum length  
is 44 characters. The default is <c>^[1,5]x.  
The following example displays item Destination Menu Break Sequence set to <c><33>.  
System Menu  
System Prompt . . . ................................................. [232]  
Destination Menu Break Sequence . . . . . . . ..................... <c><33>  
Ethernet Port Settings  
Description  
The Ethernet port settings are configured using two menu items:  
z 10BaseT Ethernet—Enables or disables the 10BaseT Ethernet port on the front  
panel of AI232.  
z Dual Ethernet—Enables or disables simultaneous operation of the faceplate  
mounted 10BaseT Ethernet port and the IRB.  
ꢀ
Note: When the dual Ethernet setting is enabled, the 10BaseT Ethernet setting  
has no effect on AI232 operation.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle for both menu items  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14 pg 2.  
2. For 01*10 Base T Ethernet, enter 1to select OFF or ON. The default is OFF.  
3. For 07*Dual Ethernet, enter 7to select OFF or ON. The default is OFF.  
This example displays 01*10 Base T Ethernet set to ON and 07*Dual Ethernet set to OFF.  
>7  
Menu 4.2.14 pg 2  
01*10 Base T Ethernet------------------------------------------------------- ON  
02+Radius Configuration Menu  
03 Destination Menu Break Sequence-----------------------------------<c>^[1,5]x  
04+TACACS Configuration Menu  
05 TCP Outgoing Connection Timer (2-360s)-----------------------------------075  
06+TID to Modem Mux Configuration Menu  
07*Dual Ethernet (On, Off)--------------------------------------------------OFF  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the System Menu.  
2. For 10 Base T Ethernet, select Off or On. The default is off when running in switch  
mode. The default is on when running in standalone mode.  
3. For Dual Ethernet, select Off or On. The default is Off.  
This example displays 10 Base T Ethernet set to ON and Dual Ethernet set to OFF.  
System Menu  
System Prompt . . . ................................................. [232]  
Destination Menu Break Sequence . . . . . . . ..................... <c><33>  
TCP Default Window Size . . . . . . . . . .  
TCP Send Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[200]  
512  
1024  
On  
2048  
[Off]  
Telnet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 23  
FTP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 21  
10 Base T Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Dual Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Off  
[Off]  
[On]  
On  
FTP Port  
Description  
This menu item sets the FTP server port number.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.  
2. For 16 FTP port number, enter 16,and the FTP server port number. Valid values are  
1 to 65534. The default is 21.  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration  
This example displays 16 FTP port number set to 220.  
>16,220  
Menu 4.2.14 pg 1  
01 IP Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254)-----------------------000.000.000.000  
02 IP Address Range (1 - 255)-----------------------------------------------001  
03 IP Subnet Mask (0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.254) ------------------255.255.255.254  
04 Primary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -------000.000.000.000  
05 Secondary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -----000.000.000.000  
06*TCP Default Window Size (200, 512, 1024, 2048)-------------------------- 200  
07*TCP Send Ahead-----------------------------------------------------------OFF  
08+SNMP System Parameters  
12+Link Setup  
14+IP Static Routes  
15 Telnet port number (1..65534)------------------------------------------00023  
16 FTP port number (1..65534)---------------------------------------------00220  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the System Menu.  
2. For FTP Port, enter the desired FTP port value. Valid values are from 0 to 65534.  
This example displays FTP Port set to 1752.  
System Menu  
System Prompt . . . ................................................. [232]  
Destination Menu Break Sequence . . . . . . . ..................... <c><33>  
TCP Default Window Size . . . . . . . . . .  
[200]  
512  
1024  
On  
2048  
[Off]  
TCP Send Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Telnet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 23  
FTP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1752  
IP Settings  
Description  
The IP settings are configurable using five menu items in the CLC menu or via a shell  
command on AI232. The configurable values are:  
z
z
z
z
z
IP address  
IP address range  
IP subnet mask  
Primary IP router address  
Secondary IP router address.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration  
Menu Item Types  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.  
2. For 01 IP Address, enter 1,and the IP address for AI232. The default is  
000.000.000.000.  
3. For 02 IP Address Range, enter 2,and the number of the IP addresses to be  
assigned to AI232. The valid range is 1 to 255.  
4. For 03 IP Subnet Mask, enter 3,and the IP subnet mask for AI232. The default is  
255.255.255.254.  
5. For 04 Primary IP Router Address, enter 4,and the IP address of the primary router  
for AI232. The default is 000.000.000.000.  
6. For 05 Secondary IP Router Address, enter 5,and the IP address of the secondary  
router for AI232. The default is 000.000.000.000.  
This example displays:  
z 01 IP Address set to 10.38.49.12  
z 02 IP Address Range set to 3  
z 03 IP Subnet Mask set to 255.255.000.000  
z 04 Primary IP Router Address set to 010.038.000.001  
z 05 IP Router Address set to 010.038.000.002  
>5,10.38.0.2  
Menu 4.2.14 pg 1  
01 IP Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254)-----------------------010.038.049.012  
02 IP Address Range (1 - 255)-----------------------------------------------003  
03 IP Subnet Mask (0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.254) ------------------255.255.000.000  
04 Primary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -------010.038.000.001  
05 Secondary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -----010.038.000.002  
ꢀ
Note: For information about configuring IP setting with shell commands, refer to  
commands ip on page 8-61 and ip init on page 8-62.  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration  
System Prompt  
Description  
This item sets the system prompt value in the CLI.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.  
2. For 17 Prompt String, enter 17,and the desired system prompt value. There is no  
default prompt string. The maximum length is 64 characters.  
This example displays item 17 Prompt String set to NewPrompt.  
>17,NewPrompt  
Menu 4.2.14 pg 1  
01 IP Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254)-----------------------010.040.057.012  
02 IP Address Range (1 - 255)-----------------------------------------------001  
03 IP Subnet Mask (0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.254) ------------------255.255.000.000  
04 Primary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -------010.040.000.001  
05 Secondary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -----000.000.000.000  
06*TCP Default Window Size (200, 512, 1024, 2048)-------------------------- 200  
07*TCP Send Ahead-----------------------------------------------------------OFF  
08+SNMP System Parameters  
12+Link Setup  
14+IP Static Routes  
15 Telnet port number (1..65534)------------------------------------------00023  
16 FTP port number (1..65534)---------------------------------------------00021  
17 Prompt String------------------------------------------------------NewPrompt  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the System Menu.  
2. For System Prompt, enter the desired system prompt.  
This example displays System Prompt set to NewPrompt.  
System Menu  
System Prompt . . . ............................................. NewPrompt  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration  
TCP Settings  
Description  
The TCP settings are configured using two menu items. The configurable values are:  
z TCP default window size—Sets the TCP default window size for AI232. The window  
size specifies how many bytes AI232 will send to another device or how many  
bytes another device may send to the AI232 before receiving an  
acknowledgement.  
ꢀ
Note: A small default window size way slow transfers to and from AI232.  
z TCP send ahead—Enables or disables AI232’s ability to send a TCP window without  
requiring an acknowledgment. When enabled, acknowledgment is not required.  
When disabled, acknowledgment is required.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access System Menu 4.2.14.  
2. For 06*TCP Default Window Size, enter 6to select 200, 512, 1024, or 2048. The default  
is 200.  
3. For 07*TCP Send Ahead, enter 7to select OFF or ON. The default is OFF.  
This example displays 06*TCP Default Window Size set to 1024 and 07*TCP Send Ahead set  
to ON.  
>7  
Menu 4.2.14 pg 1  
01 IP Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254)-----------------------010.040.057.012  
02 IP Address Range (1 - 255)-----------------------------------------------001  
03 IP Subnet Mask (0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.254) ------------------255.255.000.000  
04 Primary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -------010.040.000.001  
05 Secondary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -----000.000.000.000  
06*TCP Default Window Size (200, 512, 1024, 2048)--------------------------1024  
07*TCP Send Ahead----------------------------------------------------------- ON  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the System Menu.  
2. For TCP Default Window Size, select 200, 512, 1024, or 2048. The default is 200.  
3. For TCP Send Ahead, select Enabled or Disabled. The default is Disabled.  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration  
This example displays TCP Default Window Size set to 1024 and TCP Send Ahead set to  
Enabled.  
System Menu  
System Prompt . . . ............................................. NewPrompt  
Destination Menu Break Sequence . . . . . . . .................. <c>^[1,5]x  
TCP Default Window Size . . . . . . . . . .  
200  
512  
[Enabled]  
[1024]  
2048  
Disabled  
TCP Send Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Telnet Port  
Description  
This item sets the Telnet port value for AI232.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.  
2. For 15 Telnet port number, enter 15,and the desired port number value. Valid  
values are 1 to 65534. The default is 23.  
This example displays 15 Telnet port number set to 122.  
>15,122  
Menu 4.2.14 pg 1  
01 IP Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254)-----------------------010.040.057.012  
02 IP Address Range (1 - 255)-----------------------------------------------001  
03 IP Subnet Mask (0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.254) ------------------255.255.000.000  
04 Primary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -------010.040.000.001  
05 Secondary IP Router Address (0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.254) -----000.000.000.000  
06*TCP Default Window Size (200, 512, 1024, 2048)--------------------------1024  
07*TCP Send Ahead----------------------------------------------------------- ON  
08+SNMP System Parameters  
12+Link Setup  
14+IP Static Routes  
15 Telnet port number (1..65534)------------------------------------------00122  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the System Menu.  
2. For Telnet Port, enter the desired value. The default is 23.  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: General System Properties Configuration  
This example displays Telnet Port set to 55.  
System Menu  
System Prompt . . . ............................................. NewPrompt  
Destination Menu Break Sequence . . . . . . . .................. <c>^[1,5]x  
TCP Default Window Size . . . . . . . . . .  
TCP Send Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Telnet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 55  
200  
512  
[Enabled]  
[1024]  
2048  
Disabled  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: RADIUS Configuration  
RADIUS Configuration  
RADIUS authentication verifies user login information against valid user information in  
a database on a centralized RADIUS authentication server. A primary and secondary  
RADIUS server are configurable to provide secure access for an entire AI232  
network. AI232 RADIUS authentication is available for Telnet, asynchronous, and  
synchronous ports. The following menu items can be configured for RADIUS:  
z
z
Server Settings  
Shell/FTP Options  
Server Settings  
Description  
The RADIUS server settings are configured using four menu items for the primary and  
secondary server. The configurable values are:  
z Primary/secondary server status—Enables or disables the primary or secondary  
server.  
z Primary/secondary server IP address—Defines an IP address for the primary or  
secondary server.  
z Primary/secondary server port—Defines the port number for the primary or  
secondary server.  
z Primary/secondary server secret—Defines a password for the primary or secondary  
server.  
Menu Item Types  
Toggle for primary/secondary server status  
Data for primary/secondary server IP address, server port, and server secret  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
ꢀ
Note: RADIUS and TACACS+ cannot both be configured at the same time.  
Attempting to do this generates an error.  
To configure the RADIUS server settings:  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14-2.2.  
2. For 01*Primary Server Status, enter 1to select ENABLED or DISABLED. The default is  
DISABLED.  
3. For 02 Primary Server IP Address, enter 2,and the desired IP address. The default  
is 0.0.0.0.  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: RADIUS Configuration  
4. For 03 Primary Server Port, enter 3,and the desired port number. The default is  
1812.  
5. For 04 Primary Server Secret, enter 4,and the desired password. The default is  
applied.  
6. If desired, repeat steps 2 through 5 for the secondary server settings.  
This example displays:  
z 01*Primary Server Status set to ENABLED  
z 02 Primary Server IP Address set to 050.023.156.012  
z 03 Primary Server Port set to 122  
z 04 Primary Server Secret set to hilltop.  
>4,hilltop  
Menu 4.2.14-2.2  
01*Primary Server Status (Enabled, Disabled)--------------------------- ENABLED  
02 Primary Server IP Address------------------------------------050.023.156.012  
03 Primary Server Port (1..65535)-----------------------------------------00122  
04 Primary Server Secret-------------------------------  
hilltop  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the RAS Configuration Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. For RADIUS Primary Server Status, select Enabled or Disabled.  
3. For IP address, enter an IP address. The default is 0.0.0.0.  
4. For Port Number, enter a port number. The default is 1812 for RADIUS servers.  
5. For Secret, enter a password. The default is applied.  
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for the secondary RADIUS server.  
This example displays:  
z RADIUS Primary Server Status set to Enabled  
z IP Address set to 12.33.57.2  
z Port Number set to 122  
z Secret set to newone.  
RAS Configuration Menu  
RADIUS Primary Server Status . . . . . . . . . . . [Enabled] Disabled  
IP Address . . . . .... 12.33.57.2 Port Number . . . . . 122  
Secret . . . .............. newone  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: RADIUS Configuration  
Shell/FTP Options  
Description  
This item sets the Shell/FTP option for RADIUS as one of the following:  
z Enabled—Enables RADIUS login.  
z Disabled—Disables RADIUS login.  
z Local fallback—Enables RADIUS login, but resorts to local login if the RADIUS  
login fails.  
ꢀ
Note: RADIUS and TACACS+ cannot both be configured at the same time.  
Attempting to do this generates an error.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
To configure the shell/FTP RADIUS option:  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14-2.2.  
2. For 09*Shell/FTP Radius Option, enter 9to select ENABLED, DISABLED, or LOCAL  
FALLBACK. The default is DISABLED.  
This example displays 09*Shell/FTP Radius Option set to LOCAL FALLBACK.  
>9  
Menu 4.2.14-2.2  
01*Primary Server Status (Enabled, Disabled)--------------------------- ENABLED  
02 Primary Server IP Address------------------------------------050.023.156.012  
03 Primary Server Port (1..65535)-----------------------------------------00122  
04 Primary Server Secret-------------------------------  
hilltop  
05*Secondary Server Status (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------DISABLED  
06 Secondary Server IP Address----------------------------------000.000.000.000  
07 Secondary Server Port (1..65535)---------------------------------------01812  
08 Secondary Server Secret----------------------------- applied  
09*Shell/FTP Radius Option (Enabled, Disabled, Local Fallback)---LOCAL FALLBACK  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
To configure the shell/FTP RADIUS option:  
1. Access the RAS Configuration Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. For Shell RAS Option, select Disabled, RADIUS, RADIUS/Fallback. The default is  
Disabled.  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: RADIUS Configuration  
This example displays the shell RAS option set to RADIUS/Fallback.  
RAS Configuration Menu  
RADIUS Primary Server Status . . . . . . . . . . . [Enabled] Disabled  
IP Address . . . . ....... 0.0.0.0 Port Number . . . . 1812  
Secret . . . .............. newone  
RADIUS Secondary Server Status . . . . . . . . . . Enabled [Disabled]  
IP Address . . . . ....... 0.0.0.0 Port Number . . . . 1812  
Secret . . . ............. applied  
Shell RAS Option:  
Disabled  
RADIUS  
[RADIUS/Fallback]  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: TACACS+ Configuration  
TACACS+ Configuration  
TACACS+ authentication verifies user login information against the user’s permission  
level on a TACACS+ server. Up to 9 TACACS+ servers are configurable to provide  
secure access for an entire AI232 network. AI232 TACACS+ authentication is  
available for Telnet, asynchronous, and FTP connections. The following menu items  
can be configured for TACACS+ on the AI198 menu system:  
z
z
Server Settings  
Shell/FTP Options  
ꢀ
Note: TACACS+ is not configurable from the AI232 local menu system.  
Server Settings  
Description  
From the AI198 Menu System, the TACACS+ server settings are configured using  
four menu items for the primary and secondary server. The configurable values are:  
z Primary/secondary server status—Enables or disables the primary or secondary  
server.  
z Primary/secondary server IP address—Defines an IP address for the primary or  
secondary server.  
z Primary/secondary server port—Defines the port number for the primary or  
secondary server.  
z Primary/secondary server secret—Defines a password for the primary or secondary  
server.  
Menu Item Types  
Toggle for primary/secondary server status  
Data for primary/secondary server IP address, server port, and server secret  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
To configure the TACACS+ server settings:  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14-2.4.  
2. For 01*Primary Server Status, enter 1to select ENABLED or DISABLED. The default is  
DISABLED.  
3. For 02 Primary Server IP Address, enter 2,and the IP address. The default is  
0.0.0.0.  
4. For 03 Primary Server Port, enter 3,and the port number. The default is 49.  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: TACACS+ Configuration  
5. For 04 Primary Server Secret, enter 4,and the password. The default is applied.  
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for the secondary server settings.  
This example displays:  
z 01*Primary Server Status set to ENABLED  
z 02 Primary Server IP Address set to 050.023.156.011  
z 03 Primary Server Port set to 122  
z 04 Primary Server Secret set to hilltop.  
>4,hilltop  
Menu 4.2.14-2.4  
01*Primary Server Status (Enabled, Disabled)--------------------------- ENABLED  
02 Primary Server IP Address------------------------------------050.023.156.012  
03 Primary Server Port (1..65535)-----------------------------------------00122  
04 Primary Server Secret-------------------------------  
hilltop  
Shell/FTP Options  
Description  
This item sets the Shell/FTP option for TACACS+ as one of the following:  
z Enabled—Enables TACACS+ login.  
z Disabled—Disables TACACS+ login.  
z Local fallback—Enables TACACS+ login, but resorts to local login if the  
TACACS+ login fails.  
ꢀ
Note: RADIUS and TACACS+ cannot both be configured at the same time.  
Attempting to do this generates an error.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
Important: Configuration of the shell/FTP TACACS+ option results in privilege level  
authorization and supersedes any TACACS+ configuration on the AI232  
card.  
To configure the shell/FTP TACACS+ option:  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14-2.4.  
2. For 09*Shell/FTP TACACS Option, enter 9to select ENABLED, DISABLED, or LOCAL  
FALLBACK. The default is DISABLED.  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: TACACS+ Configuration  
This example displays 09*Shell/FTP TACACS Option set to LOCAL FALLBACK.  
>9  
Menu 4.2.14-2.4  
01*Primary Server Status (Enabled, Disabled)---------------------------DISABLED  
02 Primary Server IP Address------------------------------------000.000.000.000  
03 Primary Server Port (1..65535)-----------------------------------------00049  
04 Primary Server Secret-------------------------------  
applied  
05*Secondary Server Status (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------DISABLED  
06 Secondary Server IP Address----------------------------------000.000.000.000  
07 Secondary Server Port (1..65535)---------------------------------------00049  
08 Secondary Server Secret----------------------------- applied  
09*Shell/FTP TACACS Option (Enabled, Disabled, Local Fallback)---LOCAL FALLBACK  
4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: SNMP Configuration  
SNMP Configuration  
This section discusses SNMP configuration options. The following configuration  
components are available:  
z
z
z
z
z
Authentication Traps  
Community Names  
Contact Persons  
Node Information  
SNMP Manager  
Authentication Traps  
Description  
This item enables or disables the generation of authentication failure traps by AI232.  
When a user enters faulty login information, authentication traps are sent from an  
SNMP agent to inform the management station about the incorrect login attempt.  
Menu Item Types  
Toggle  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.8.  
2. For 04*Send authentication traps, enter 4to select ON or OFF. The default is ON.  
The following example displays item 04*Send authentication traps set to ON.  
>4  
Menu 4.2.14.8  
01 Contact person for this node------------------------------------------------  
02 Node name-------------------------------------------------------------------  
03 Node location---------------------------------------------------------------  
04*Send authentication traps------------------------------------------------ ON  
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the SNMP Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. For Send authentication traps, select On or Off. The default is ON.  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: SNMP Configuration  
The following example displays the selection of On for menu item Send authentication  
traps.  
SNMP Menu  
Contact person for this managed node . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Node name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............  
Node location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............  
Send authentication traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[On]  
Off  
Community Names  
Description  
SNMP community names provide embedded password access to MIB contents.  
There are 3 menu items available for configuring AI232 SNMP community name  
information:  
z Read Community Name—Sets the name that permits read only access to all objects in  
the MIB.  
z MIB2 Read Community Name—Sets the name that permits read only access to all  
objects in MIB2.  
z Write Community Name—Sets the name that permits read and write access to all  
objects in the MIB.  
Menu Item Types  
Data for all menu items  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.8.  
2. For 05 Read Community Name, enter 5,and the community name value. The  
maximum length is 32 characters. The default value is readonly.  
3. For 06 MIB2 Read Community Name, enter 6,and the community name value. The  
maximum length is 32 characters. The default value is public.  
4. For 07 Write Community Name, enter 7,and the community name value. The  
maximum length is 32 characters. The default value is administrator.  
4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: SNMP Configuration  
The following example displays:  
z
z
z
Item 05 Read Community Name set to ReadComm.  
Item 06 MIB2 Read Community Name set to MIB2.  
Item 07 Write Community Name set to WriteComm.  
>7,WriteComm  
Menu 4.2.14.8  
01 Contact person for this node------------------------------------------------  
02 Node name-------------------------------------------------------------------  
03 Node location---------------------------------------------------------------  
04*Send authentication traps------------------------------------------------ ON  
05 Read Community Name-------------------------------------------------ReadComm  
06 MIB2 Read Community Name------------------------------------------------MIB2  
07 Write Community Name-----------------------------------------------WriteComm  
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the SNMP Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. For menu item Read Community Name, enter the community name value. The  
maximum length is 32 characters. The default value is readonly.  
3. For menu item MIB2 Read Community Name, enter the community name value. The  
maximum length is 32 characters. The default value is public.  
4. For menu item Write Community Name, enter the community name value. The  
maximum length is 32 characters. The default value is administrator.  
The following example displays:  
z
z
z
Item Read Community Name set to ReadComm.  
Item MIB2 Read Community Name set to MIB2.  
Item Write Community Name set to WriteComm.  
SNMP Menu  
Contact person for this managed node . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Node name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............  
Node location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............  
Send authentication traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[On]  
Off  
SNMP Manager #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.35.0.30  
SNMP Manager #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.35.0.60  
SNMP Manager #3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.35.0.20  
SNMP Manager #4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 0.0.0.0  
SNMP Manager #5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 0.0.0.0  
Read Community Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ReadComm  
MIB2 Read Community Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... MIB2  
Write Community Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... WriteComm  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: SNMP Configuration  
Contact Persons  
Description  
This item defines the name of the person to contact regarding a specific node.  
Menu Item Types  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.8.  
2. For 01 Contact person for this node, enter 1,and the desired contact person. The  
maximum length is 40 characters.  
The following example displays John Doe configured for menu item 01 Contact person  
for this node:  
>1,John Doe  
Menu 4.2.14.8  
01 Contact person for this node----------------------------------------John Doe  
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the SNMP Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. For Contact person for this managed node, enter the contact person. The maximum  
length is 40 characters.  
The following example displays John Doe configured for menu item Contact person for  
this managed node:  
SNMP Menu  
Contact person for this managed node . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... John Doe  
Node Information  
Description  
There are two menu items available for configuring node information:  
z Node Name—Defines the name of a location on a network.  
z Node Location—Defines a location on a network.  
Menu Item Types  
Data  
4-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: SNMP Configuration  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.8.  
2. For 02 Node name, enter 2,and the node name. The maximum length is 40  
characters.  
3. For 03 Node location, enter 3,and a node location description. The maximum  
length is 40 characters.  
The following example displays the configuration of node name newNode and node  
location Office B.  
>3,Office B  
Menu 4.2.14.8  
01 Contact person for this node----------------------------------------John Doe  
02 Node name------------------------------------------------------------newNode  
03 Node location-------------------------------------------------------Office B  
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the SNMP Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. For Node name, enter the node name. The maximum length is 40 characters.  
3. For Node location, enter a node location description. The maximum length is 40  
characters.  
The following example displays the configuration of node name newNode and node  
location Office B.  
SNMP Menu  
Contact person for this managed node . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... John Doe  
Node name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... newNode  
Node location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... Office B  
SNMP Manager  
Description  
An SNMP manager is a combination of monitoring software running on a network  
management station (NMS) and the actual device running the software. It collects and  
acts on information from the various devices being monitored and/or controlled. The  
SNMP manager also periodically polls the devices it is managing to get status  
information. AI232 allows for the configuration of up to 5 SNMP managers.  
ꢀ
Note: SNMP managers are only configurable when AI232 is in standalone mode.  
They are not configurable through the AI198 menu system.  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: SNMP Configuration  
Menu Item Types  
Data  
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the SNMP Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. For SNMP Manager #1, enter the IP address of the first SNMP manager. The default  
is 0.0.0.0.  
3. For SNMP Manager #2, enter the IP address of the second SNMP manager. The  
default is 0.0.0.0.  
4. For SNMP Manager #3, enter the IP address of the third SNMP manager. The default  
is 0.0.0.0.  
5. For SNMP Manager #4, enter the IP address of the fourth SNMP manager. The  
default is 0.0.0.0.  
6. For SNMP Manager #5, enter the IP address of the fifth SNMP manager. The default  
is 0.0.0.0.  
The following example displays:  
z SNMP Manager #1 set to 10.65.32.4  
z SNMP Manager #2 set to 10.65.32.5  
z SNMP Manager #3 set to 10.65.32.6  
z SNMP Manager #4 set to 10.65.32.7  
z SNMP Manager #5 set to 10.65.32.8  
SNMP Menu  
Contact person for this managed node . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Node name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............  
Node location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............  
Send authentication traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[On]  
Off  
SNMP Manager #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.65.32.4  
SNMP Manager #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.65.32.5  
SNMP Manager #3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.65.32.6  
SNMP Manager #4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.65.32.7  
SNMP Manager #5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 10.65.32.8  
4-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: Static Route Configuration  
Static Route Configuration  
AI232 allows for the configuration of static routes using both the AI198 and AI232  
menu systems.  
IP Address Settings  
Description  
Static routes are configured with a destination and next hop IP address. The  
destination IP address defines the static IP route you want to configure. The next hop  
IP address defines the IP address of the router you want the system to use when  
trying to reach the destination IP address.  
Menu Item Types  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.14.  
2. From Menu 4.2.14.14, enter a value from 3to 11. Menu 4.2.14.14.1 appears.  
3. For 01 Destination IP, enter an IP address value.  
4. For 02 Next Hop IP, enter an IP address value.  
The following example displays the configuration of destination address 84.238.45.2  
and next hop address 23.51.93.5.  
>2,023.051.093.005  
Menu 4.2.14.14.1  
01 Destination IP-----------------------------------------------084.238.045.002  
02 Next Hop IP--------------------------------------------------023.051.093.005  
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the Static Route Menu.  
2. Select [Add]. The IP Static Route Edit Menu appears.  
3. For Destination IP Address, enter an IP address value. The default is 1.1.1.1.  
4. For Next Hop IP Address, enter an IP address value. The default is 1.1.1.1.  
The following example displays the configuration of destination IP address 12.240.54.3  
and next hop IP address 12.240.54.4.  
IP Static Route Edit Menu  
Destination IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... 12.240.54.3  
Next Hop IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... 12.240.54.4  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: TID to Modem Mux Configuration  
TID to Modem Mux Configuration  
The following are available:  
z
z
z
z
Inactivity Timeout  
Initialization String  
Port Bit Settings  
TID to Route  
Inactivity Timeout  
Description  
This menu item defines the amount of time (in seconds) the Modem Mux connection  
must be inactive before it times out.  
Menu Item Types  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14-2.6.  
2. From Menu 4.2.14-2.6, enter a value from 2to 11. Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1 appears.  
3. For 06 Inactivity Timeout, enter 6,and a timeout value. Valid values are from 0 to  
100000. The default is 300.  
This example displays 06 Inactivity Timeout set to 1500.  
>6,1500  
Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1  
01 TID to route--------------------------------------------  
02*Port Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------8  
03*Port Stop Bits (1, 2)------------------------------------------------------1  
04*Port Parity (None, Even, Odd)-------------------------------------------None  
05 Init String-----------------------------------  
06 Inactivity Timeout (0 - 100000)---------------------------------------001500  
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the TID to Modem Mux Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. From the TID to Modem Mux Summary Menu, select [Add TID]. The TID To  
Modem Mux Edit Menu appears.  
3. For Inactivity Timeout, enter a timeout value. Valid values are from 0 to 100000.  
The default is 300.  
4-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: TID to Modem Mux Configuration  
This example displays Inactivity Timeout set to 1500.  
TID To Modem Mux Edit Menu  
TID to route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .....................  
Port Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Seven  
[One]  
Even  
[Eight]  
Two  
Odd  
Port Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[None]  
Init String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...............................  
Inactivity Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 1500  
Initialization String  
Description  
This menu item defines the string that is sent upon indication that there is a device  
connected to the port (DSR asserted).  
Menu Item Types  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14-2.6.  
2. From Menu 4.2.14-2.6, enter a value from 2to 11. Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1 appears.  
3. For 05 Init String, enter 5,and an initialization string value. Maximum length is  
30 characters.  
This example displays 05 Init String set to conn23.  
>5,conn23  
Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1  
01 TID to route--------------------------------------------  
02*Port Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------8  
03*Port Stop Bits (1, 2)------------------------------------------------------1  
04*Port Parity (None, Even, Odd)-------------------------------------------None  
05 Init String-----------------------------------  
conn23  
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the TID to Modem Mux Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. From the TID to Modem Mux Summary Menu, select [Add TID]. The TID To  
Modem Mux Edit Menu appears.  
3. For Init String, enter a string value. Maximum length is 30 characters.  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: TID to Modem Mux Configuration  
This example displays Init String set to conn23.  
TID To Modem Mux Edit Menu  
TID to route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .....................  
Port Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Seven  
[One]  
Even  
[Eight]  
Two  
Odd  
Port Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[None]  
Init String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................ conn23  
Port Bit Settings  
Description  
There are 3 menu items available for configuring TID to Modem Mux port bits:  
z Port Data Bits—Defines the number of databits in a data byte.  
z Port Stop Bits—Defines the number of stop bits for TID to Modem Mux. A stop bit  
is an extra bit at the end of an asynchronous character that helps the receiver  
recognize the end of the character.  
z Port Parity—Defines parity, which is a process for detecting whether or not bits of  
data have been altered during data transmission.  
Menu Item Types  
Toggle for all menu items  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14-2.6.  
2. From Menu 4.2.14-2.6, enter a value from 2to 11. Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1 appears.  
3. For 02*Port Data Bits, enter 2,to select 7 or 8. The default is 8.  
4. For 03*Port Stop Bits, enter 3,to select 1 or 2. The default is 1.  
5. For 04*Port Parity, enter 4,to select None, Even, or Odd. The default is None.  
This example displays:  
z 02*Port Data Bits set to 7  
z 03*Port Stop Bits set to 1  
z 04*Port Parity set to Even.  
>4,Even  
Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1  
01 TID to route--------------------------------------------  
02*Port Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------7  
03*Port Stop Bits (1, 2)------------------------------------------------------1  
04*Port Parity (None, Even, Odd)-------------------------------------------Even  
4-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: TID to Modem Mux Configuration  
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the TID to Modem Mux Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. From the System Menu, select TID to Modem Mux. The TID to Modem Mux  
Summary Menu appears.  
3. From the TID to Modem Mux Summary Menu, select [Add TID]. The TID To  
Modem Mux Edit Menu appears.  
4. For Port Data Bits, select 7 or 8. The default is 8.  
5. For Port Stop Bits, select 1 or 2. The default is 1.  
6. For Port Parity, select None, Even, or Odd. The default is None.  
This example displays:  
z Port Data Bits set to 7  
z Port Stop Bits set to 1  
z Port Parity set to Even.  
TID To Modem Mux Edit Menu  
TID to route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .....................  
Port Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Seven]  
[One]  
[Even]  
Eight  
Two  
Odd  
Port Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
None  
TID to Route  
Description  
This menu item defines the string that represents the TID to be routed to the Modem  
Mux link.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14-2.6.  
2. From Menu 4.2.14-2.6, enter a value from 2to 11. Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1 appears.  
3. For 01 TID to route, enter 1,and the desired TID. Maximum length is 20  
characters.  
This example displays the TID configured as COLUMBUS-OH.  
>1 columbus-oh  
Menu 4.2.14-2.6.1  
COLUMBUS-OH  
01 TID to route--------------------------------------------  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: TID to Modem Mux Configuration  
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the TID to Modem Mux Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. From the TID to Modem Mux Summary Menu, select [Add TID]. The TID To  
Modem Mux Edit Menu appears.  
3. For TID to route, enter the desired TID. Maximum length is 20 characters.  
This example displays the TID configured as COLUMBUS-OH.  
TID To Modem Mux Edit Menu  
TID to route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... COLUMBUS-OH  
4-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: Time Configuration  
Time Configuration  
AI232 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). SNTP is a time protocol  
that maintains a common time among Internet hosts.  
ꢀ
Note: Time configuration options are only available when AI232 is operating in  
standalone mode.  
The following configuration items are available:  
z
z
z
Daylight Savings Time  
SNTP Settings  
Time Zone  
Daylight Savings Time  
Description  
This menu item enables or disables daylight savings time, which is when clocks are  
set ahead one hour the first Sunday in April and back one hour the last Sunday in  
October to provide an extra hour of daylight during summer.  
Menu Item Types  
Toggle  
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the System Menu.  
2. From the System Menu, select Time Menu. The Time Menu appears.  
3. For Daylight Saving Time on this host is, select Enabled or Disabled.  
This example displays Daylight Saving Time on this host is set to Enabled.  
Time Menu  
Current Time Zone (+/-hh:mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+00:00  
Daylight Saving Time on this host is . . . . . . . .  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: Time Configuration  
SNTP Settings  
Description  
SNTP is a time protocol that maintains a common time among Internet hosts. There  
are 4 menu items available for configuring SNTP settings:  
z SNTP client on this host is—Enables or disables SNTP. If Enabled is selected, the  
system attempts to contact the primary and secondary SNTP servers for the exact  
time. If AI232 is unable to contact either the primary or secondary SNTP server, it  
uses the local time maintained by AI232. If Disabled is selected, the system uses  
the local time maintained by AI232.  
z Primary SNTP Server—Defines the IP address of the first SNTP server from which  
AI232 will attempt to retrieve the exact time.  
z Secondary SNTP Server—Defines the IP address of the second SNTP server from  
which AI232 will attempt to retrieve the exact time.  
ꢀ
Note: The SNTP client must be enabled before the primary or secondary SNTP  
server can be defined.  
z SNTP Poll Interval (minutes)—Defines the time interval (in minutes) for AI232 to  
poll the SNTP servers.  
Menu Item Types  
Toggle for SNTP client on this host is  
Data for Primary SNTP Server, Secondary SNTP Server, and SNTP Poll Interval (minutes)  
settings  
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the Time Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. For SNTP client on this host is, select Enabled or Disabled. The default is Enabled.  
3. For Primary SNTP Server, enter the primary server IP address. The default is  
0.0.0.0.  
4. For Secondary SNTP Server, enter the secondary server IP address. The default is  
0.0.0.0.  
5. For SNTP Poll Interval (minutes), enter the time in minutes for the SNTP servers to  
be polled. The default is 10.  
4-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: Time Configuration  
This following example displays:  
z SNTP client on this host is set to Enabled  
z Primary SNTP Server set to 12.43.167.59  
z Secondary SNTP Server set to 12.43.167.60  
z SNTP Poll Interval (minutes) set to 7.  
Time Menu  
Current Time Zone (+/-hh:mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+00:00  
Daylight Saving Time on this host is . . . . . . . .  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
SNTP client on this host is . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Enabled]  
Disabled  
Primary SNTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 12.43.167.59  
Secondary SNTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 12.43.167.60  
SNTP Poll Interval (minutes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 7  
Time Zone  
Description  
This menu item configures the time zone for AI232 to use. The configured value  
represents the number of hours you are from UTC.  
Menu Item Types  
Data  
AI232 Local Menu Item Configuration  
1. Access the Time Menu located under the System Menu.  
2. For Current Time Zone (+/-hh:mm), enter the time zone you want AI232 to use:  
z
For +/-, enter the direction (+ = east) (- = west) of Universal Coordinated Time  
(UTC) or Greenwich Mean Time.  
z
z
For hh, enter the number of hours.  
For mm, enter the number of minutes.  
ꢀ
Note: The time entered is the number of hours you are from UTC. For example,  
if you are located in the Eastern Standard Time (EST) zone, you would  
enter -05:00 in this field. This indicates that you are 5 hours behind UTC.  
This example displays a time zone configuration of -05:00.  
Time Menu  
Current Time Zone (+/-hh:mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-05:00  
4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
System Configuration: Time Configuration  
4-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Link Configuration  
This chapter provides information on configuring AI232 links in the AI198 and AI232 local menu  
systems.  
Guide to this Chapter  
AI232 Link Types  
Connect Options Configuration  
Disconnect Options Configuration  
General Link Properties Configuration  
General PPP Properties Configuration  
Modem Option Configuration  
PPP Authentication Configuration  
RTS/DTR Lead Control Configuration  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: AI232 Link Types  
AI232 Link Types  
AI232 has 3 configurable link types:  
z
z
z
Asynchronous  
Asynchronous PPP  
Modem Multiplexer  
Asynchronous  
Asynchronous links use asynchronous transmission and support multiple baud rates,  
parity types, stop bits, and software flow or hardware control.  
See Also  
z
z
z
z
z
Connect Options Configuration  
Disconnect Options Configuration  
General Link Properties Configuration  
Modem Option Configuration  
RTS/DTR Lead Control Configuration  
Asynchronous PPP  
Asynchronous PPP links use PPP (point-to-point protocol) and asynchronous  
transmission. They support PAP and CHAP for authentication and can be set as  
bridged (BCP) or routed (IPCP) interfaces.  
See Also  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Connect Options Configuration  
Disconnect Options Configuration  
General Link Properties Configuration  
General PPP Properties Configuration  
Modem Option Configuration  
PPP Authentication Configuration  
RTS/DTR Lead Control Configuration  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: AI232 Link Types  
Modem Multiplexer  
The modem multiplexer gives users access to a modem pool. The modem pool is the  
list of ModMux links with attached modems. When a call comes in that requires a  
modem, one is selected from the pool and dials out appropriately. The phone number  
to dial is configurable for incoming calls that need to be attached to modems.  
ꢀ
Note: Round-robin dialing has been incorporated for ModMux links to minimize the  
demand placed on individual modems. Rather than always starting at the first  
available modem, the ModMux driver rotates through all available modems so  
that the first available one is not always the first to be dialed.  
See Also  
z
z
z
General Link Properties Configuration  
General PPP Properties Configuration  
PPP Authentication Configuration  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration  
Connect Options Configuration  
Connect options configure the AI232 connection parameters. These options are  
available for asynchronous links and asynchronous PPP links. The following  
configuration items are available:  
z
z
z
z
z
Alias  
Call Retry Interval  
Connect String  
Connection Settings  
Link Application  
Alias  
Description  
This menu item specifies an alias name for the connection. When the link connection  
options are satisfied, a call is placed based on information contained in the alias  
name.  
The specified name must correspond to an alias that has been created in the Alias  
Menu. If no alias name is specified and Link Application is set to ALIAS in the AI198  
menu system (AppAlias in the AI232 local menu system), then a default alias is used.  
The default alias is the concatenation of the string asy. with the numeric link number,  
such as asy.3, which indicates link number 3.  
ꢀ
Note: The 02 Alias menu item is used only if 01*Link Application is set to ALIAS  
(AppAlias in the AI232 local menu system).  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
Async  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.11.  
2. For 02 Alias, enter 2,and the alias name.  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration  
This example displays 02 Alias set to async.4.1.  
>2,async.4.1  
Menu 4.2.14.12.11  
01*Link Application (Login, Destination, Alias)---------------------------ALIAS  
02 Alias--------------------------------------------------------------async.4.1  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu.  
2. Select Connect Options Menu. The Connect Options Menu appears.  
3. For Link Application Alias, enter the alias value.  
This example displays Link Application Alias set to async.4.1.  
Connect Options Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1
Link Application . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Login  
Destination  
[AppAlias]  
Link Application Alias . . . . . . ................................. async.4.1  
Call Retry Interval  
Description  
This menu item defines a value for the call retry interval. If a call fails to connect and  
the retry interval is greater than 0, the link attempts to place the call again after the  
specified number of seconds elapse. This setting has no effect on calls placed to the  
link when the link is the destination and not the call originator. A value of 0 disables  
call retry interval functionality.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
Async  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.11.  
2. For 03 Call retry interval, enter 3,and the interval value. The default is 0.  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration  
This example displays 03 Call retry interval set to 134.  
>3,134  
Menu 4.2.14.12.11  
01*Link Application (Login, Destination, Alias)---------------------------ALIAS  
02 Alias--------------------------------------------------------------async.4.1  
03 Call retry interval (0 - 32767 s, 0 = disabled)------------------------00134  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu.  
2. Select Connect Options Menu. The Connect Options Menu appears.  
3. For Call Retry Interval, enter the desired interval value. The default is 0.  
This example displays Call Retry Interval set to 134.  
Connect Options Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1
Link Application . . . . . . . . . . . . Login Destination [AppAlias]  
Link Application Alias . . . . . . ................................. async.4.1  
Call Retry Interval (0 - 32767s, 0 = disable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 134  
Connect String  
Description  
This menu item configures the string that is sent after a connection is established. The  
following character values apply:  
z <b>sends a break signal.  
z <n>represents the decimal value of an ASCII character. Valid values are 0 to 255.  
z textrepresents the text value in the string.  
z <p #>represents a pause control sequence. #is the number of tenths of seconds  
to pause. Valid values are 1 to 20 (for 0.1 seconds to 2 seconds).  
For example, string <b>login<13><p 10><b> sends:  
z
z
z
z
z
A break signal  
Text “login”  
A carriage return  
A 1 second pause  
Another break signal.  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
Async  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.11.  
2. For 08 Connect string, enter 8,and the connect string.  
This example displays 08 Connect string set to <b>newstring<33><p 13><b>.  
>8,<b>newstring<33><p 13><b>  
Menu 4.2.14.12.11  
01*Link Application (Login, Destination, Alias)---------------------------ALIAS  
02 Alias--------------------------------------------------------------async.4.1  
03 Call retry interval (0 - 32767 s, 0 = disabled)------------------------00134  
04 Dial/Connect when DSR is on----------------------------------------------N/A  
05*Connect when DCD is on---------------------------------------------------OFF  
06*Connect when characters are received------------------------------------- ON  
07*Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters--------------------------OFF  
08 Connect string-------------------------------------<b>newstring<33><p 13><b>  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu.  
2. Select Connect Options Menu. The Connect Options Menu appears.  
3. For Connect String, enter the connect string.  
This example displays Connect String set to <b>newstring<33><p 13><b>.  
Connect Options Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1
Link Application . . . . . . . . . . . . Login Destination [AppAlias]  
Link Application Alias . . . . . . ................................. async.4.1  
Call Retry Interval (0 - 32767s, 0 = disable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 134  
Dial/Connect when DSR is on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Connect when DCD is on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Connect when characters are received. . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters . . . . . . . .  
On  
[On]  
On  
[Off]  
Off  
[Off]  
[Off]  
On  
Connect String . . . . . . . . . . . ............... <b>newstring<33><p 13><b>  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration  
Connection Settings  
Description  
The connection settings are configured using three menu items:  
z Connect when DCD is on—Enables or disables link connection when DCD is  
asserted. If Connect when characters are received is also enabled and is satisfied  
first, then Connect when DCD is on has no effect on the link connection.  
z Connect when characters are received—Enables or disables the link connection  
when incoming characters are received. If Connect when DCD is on is also enabled  
and is satisfied first, then Connect when characters are receivedhas no effect on the  
link connection.  
z Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters—When this menu item is enabled,  
Connect when DCD is on and Connect when characters are received are forced off and  
the retry interval is set to 30. If the link application type is set to LOGIN or ALIAS,  
connection will occur as soon as the link is enabled (completely independent from  
the DCD and incoming character status). If the link application type is set to  
DESTINATION, the link will connect immediately when an outgoing call is placed to  
the destination (also completely independent from DCD and incoming character  
status).  
ꢀ
Note: Dial/Connect when DSR is on has no effect on AI232 operation.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
Async  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.11.  
2. For 05*Connect when DCD is on, enter 5to select ON or OFF. The default is OFF.  
3. For 06*Connect when characters are received, enter 6to select ON or OFF. The default  
is ON.  
4. For 07*Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters, enter 7to select ON or OFF.  
The default is OFF.  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration  
This example displays:  
z 05*Connect when DCD is on set to ON  
z 06*Connect when characters are received set to OFF  
z 07*Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters set to OFF.  
>5  
Menu 4.2.14.12.11  
01*Link Application (Login, Destination, Alias)---------------------------ALIAS  
02 Alias--------------------------------------------------------------async.4.1  
03 Call retry interval (0 - 32767 s, 0 = disabled)------------------------00030  
04 Dial/Connect when DSR is on----------------------------------------------N/A  
05*Connect when DCD is on--------------------------------------------------- ON  
06*Connect when characters are received-------------------------------------OFF  
07*Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters--------------------------OFF  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu.  
2. Select Connect Options Menu. The Connect Options Menu appears.  
3. For Connect when DCD is on, select ON or OFF. The default is OFF.  
4. For Connect when characters are received, select ON or OFF. The default is ON.  
5. For Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters, select ON or OFF. The default is  
OFF.  
This example displays:  
z Connect when DCD is on set to On  
z Connect when characters are received set to Off  
z Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters set to Off.  
Connect Options Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1
Link Application . . . . . . . . . . . . Login Destination [AppAlias]  
Link Application Alias . . . . . . ................................. async.4.1  
Call Retry Interval (0 - 32767s, 0 = disable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 134  
Dial/Connect when DSR is on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Connect when DCD is on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Connect when characters are received. . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Connect without DSR, DCD or received characters . . . . . . . .  
On  
[On]  
On  
[Off]  
Off  
[Off]  
[Off]  
On  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration  
Link Application  
Description  
This menu item configures the link application type. The following options are  
available:  
z Login—Specifies that the link will prompt for a user name and password when  
connected. Upon successful login, a menu appears showing the available  
destination alias names.  
z Destination—Specifies that the link does not accept incoming calls. The link must  
be accessed internally using alias lookup from another link or from a TCP/IP  
connection.  
z Alias (AppAlias)—Specifies that the link will attempt to place a call using direct  
alias lookup without displaying a destination menu. If the link has a link application  
alias name configured, then that name is used. Otherwise, a default alias name  
(ASY.linkNum) is used.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
Async  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.11.  
2. For 01*Link Application, enter 1to select LOGIN, DESTINATION, or ALIAS. The default is  
LOGIN.  
This example displays 01*Link Application set to DESTINATION.  
>1  
Menu 4.2.14.12.11  
01*Link Application (Login, Destination, Alias)---------------------DESTINATION  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Connect Options Configuration  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu.  
2. Select Connect Options Menu. The Connect Options Menu appears.  
3. For Link Application, select Login, Destination, or AppAlias. The default is Login.  
This example displays Link Application set to Destination.  
Connect Options Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1
Link Application . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Login  
[Destination]  
AppAlias  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Disconnect Options Configuration  
Disconnect Options Configuration  
Disconnect options configure the parameters that are used when AI232 disconnects.  
These options are available for asynchronous and asynchronous PPP links. The  
following configuration items are available:  
z
z
z
Disconnect Inactivity Timer Settings  
Disconnect Settings  
Disconnect String  
Disconnect Inactivity Timer Settings  
Description  
The disconnect inactivity timer settings are configured using three menu items:  
z Disconnect inactivity timer—Defines an inactivity timer value. This value  
establishes a timeout interval after which the link will automatically disconnect if  
no data has been sent or received for the specified number of seconds. This value  
only applies to incoming calls on links that have a retry interval timer setting of 0  
and a link application setting of LOGIN or ALIAS (AppAlias).  
ꢀ
Note: The Disconnect inactivity timeroption must be set to a value greater than  
0 for the inactivity timer to function.  
z Inactivity timer enabled when link receives call—Enables or disables the  
disconnect inactivity timer when the link receives a call.  
z Inactivity timer resets on incoming characters from destination—When enabled,  
incoming characters count as activity on a link (the inactivity timer resets). When  
disabled, they do not count (the inactivity timer does not reset).  
Menu Item Type  
Data for disconnect inactivity timer  
Toggle for Inactivity timer enabled when link receives call and Inactivity timer resets  
on incoming characters from destination  
Link Type Availability  
Async  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.12.  
2. For 04 Disconnect inactivity timer, enter 4,and the timer value. The default is 0.  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Disconnect Options Configuration  
3. For 05*Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call, enter 5to select ON or OFF.  
The default is OFF.  
4. For 06*Inactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination, enter 6to  
select ON or OFF. The default is ON.  
This example displays:  
z 04 Disconnect inactivity timer set to 236  
z 05*Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call set to ON  
z 06*Inactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination set to OFF.  
>6  
Menu 4.2.14.12.12  
01 Disconnect when DSR off--------------------------------------------------N/A  
02*Disconnect when DCD off--------------------------------------------------OFF  
03*Disconnect when a break character is received---------------------------- ON  
04 Disconnect inactivity timer (0 - 32767 s, 0 = disabled)----------------00236  
05*Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call------------------------- ON  
06*Inactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination----------OFF  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu.  
2. Select Disconnect Options Menu. The Disconnect Options Menu appears.  
3. For Disconnect inactivity timer, enter the timer value. The default is 0.  
4. For Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call, select On or Off. The default  
is Off.  
5. For Inactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination, select On or  
Off. The default is On.  
This example displays:  
z Disconnect inactivity timer set to 367.  
z Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call set to On.  
z Inactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination set to Off.  
Disconnect Options Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3
Disconnect when DCD is off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Disconnect when a Break character is received . . . . . . . . .  
On  
[On]  
[Off]  
Off  
Disconnect inactivity timer (0 - 32767s, 0 = disabled) . . . . . . . . . .. 367  
Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call . . . . . . . .  
Inactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination  
[On]  
On  
Off  
[Off]  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Disconnect Options Configuration  
Disconnect Settings  
Description  
The disconnect settings are configured using two menu items:  
z Disconnect when a break character is received—Enables or disables link  
disconnection when a break character is received.  
z Disconnect when DCD off—Enables or disables link disconnection when DCD is not  
asserted.  
ꢀ
Note: AI232 does not consider the DSR state when disconnecting calls.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
Both menu items are available for async links  
Menu item Disconnect when DCD off is available for asyncPPP links  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.12.  
2. For 02*Disconnect when DCD off, enter 2to select ON or OFF. The default is OFF.  
3. For 03*Disconnect when a break character is received, enter 3to select ON or OFF.  
The default is ON.  
This example displays 02*Disconnect when DCD off set to ON and 03*Disconnect when a  
break character is received set to OFF.  
>3  
Menu 4.2.14.12.12  
01 Disconnect when DSR off--------------------------------------------------N/A  
02*Disconnect when DCD off-------------------------------------------------- ON  
03*Disconnect when a break character is received----------------------------OFF  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu.  
2. Select Disconnect Options Menu. The Disconnect Options Menu appears.  
3. For Disconnect when DCD is off, select On or Off. The default is Off.  
4. For Disconnect when a Break character is received, select On or Off. The default is  
On.  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Disconnect Options Configuration  
This example displays Disconnect when DCD is offset to Onand Disconnect when a Break  
character is received set to Off for an async link.  
Disconnect Options Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3
Disconnect when DSR is off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Disconnect when DCD is off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Disconnect when a Break character is received . . . . . . . . .  
On  
[On]  
On  
[Off]  
Off  
[Off]  
Disconnect String  
Description  
This menu item configures the string the link sends before the link disconnects. The  
following character values apply:  
z <b>sends a break signal.  
z <n>represents the decimal value of an ASCII character. Valid values are 0 to 255.  
z textrepresents the text value in the string.  
z <p #>represents a pause control sequence. #is the number of tenths of seconds  
to pause. Valid values are 1 to 20 (for 0.1 seconds to 2 seconds).  
For example, string <b>login<13><p 10><b> sends:  
z
z
z
z
z
A break signal  
The text “login”  
A carriage return  
A one second pause  
Another break signal.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
Async  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.12.  
2. For 07 Disconnect string, enter 7,and the disconnect string. Maximum length is  
80 characters.  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Disconnect Options Configuration  
This example displays 07 Disconnect string set to <b>newString<33><p 15><b>.  
>7,<b>newString<33><p 15><b>  
Menu 4.2.14.12.12  
01 Disconnect when DSR off--------------------------------------------------N/A  
02*Disconnect when DCD off-------------------------------------------------- ON  
03*Disconnect when a break character is received----------------------------OFF  
04 Disconnect inactivity timer (0 - 32767 s, 0 = disabled)----------------00000  
05*Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call-------------------------OFF  
06*Inactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination---------- ON  
07 Disconnect string----------------------------------<b>newString<33><p 15><b>  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu.  
2. Select Disconnect Options Menu. The Disconnect Options Menu appears.  
3. For Disconnect String, enter the disconnect string.  
This example displays Disconnect String set to <b>newString<33><p 15><b>.  
Disconnect Options Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3
Disconnect when DCD is off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Disconnect when a Break character is received . . . . . . . . .  
Disconnect inactivity timer (0 - 32767s, 0 = disabled) . . . . . . . . . .. 367  
[On]  
On  
Off  
[Off]  
Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call . . . . . . . .  
Inactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination  
Disconnect String . . . . . . . . . . .............. <b>newString<33><p 15><b>  
[On]  
On  
Off  
[Off]  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
General Link Properties Configuration  
General link properties are configurable using menus accessed directly from the link  
configuration menu. The following configuration items are available:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
Auto Disable Error Limit  
Flow Control  
z
z
z
z
z
Port Data Bits  
Port Parity  
Link Description  
Link Number  
Port Speed  
Port Stop Bits  
Xon Repeat Interval  
Link State  
Link Type  
Auto Disable Error Limit  
Description  
This menu item disables a link when the rate of errors received on that link exceeds a  
user-specified threshold. This prevents a bad link or cable from streaming enough  
errors to lock up or crash AI232.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
Async, AsyncPPP, and ModMux  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.  
2. For Auto Disable Error Limit, enter the associated item number, a comma, and the  
error limit value. (For example, 9,25000.) The default is 0.  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
This ModMux link example displays 08 Auto Disable Error Limit set to 25000.  
>8,25000  
Menu 4.2.14.12  
01 Link Number (1-32)--------------------------------------------------------01  
02*Link Type (Async, AsyncPPP, ModMux)--------------------------------- ModMux  
03 Link Description------------------------------  
Async link 1  
04*Link state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled  
05+Port speed------------------------------------------------------------- 9600  
06*Flow Control (None, XonXoff)-----------------------------------------  
None  
07 Xon Repeat interval (0 - 120s with 0 = no repeat)------------------------000  
08 Auto Disable Error Limit (0-1000000)---------------------------------0025000  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Link Menu.  
2. Select Auto Disable Menu. The Link Auto Disable Menu appears.  
3. For Errors/second limit for auto disable, enter the error limit value. The default  
is 0.  
This example displays Errors/second limit for auto-disable set to 25000.  
Link Auto Disable Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
03  
Errors/second limit for auto-disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25000  
Flow Control  
Description  
This menu item enables a receiving device to tell a sending device to stop sending  
data when data is coming too fast and to start sending data when the receiver is  
ready.  
There are two available flow control options for AI232:  
z None—Specifies no flow control.  
z XonXoff—Specifies the flow control option that uses standard ASCII control  
characters to tell a sending device to stop or resume data transmission.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
Async, AsyncPPP, and ModMux  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.  
2. For 09*Flow Control, enter 9to select None or XonXoff. The default is None.  
This async link example displays 09*Flow Control set to XonXoff.  
>9  
Menu 4.2.14.12  
01 Link Number (1-32)--------------------------------------------------------01  
02*Link Type (Async, AsyncPPP, ModMux)--------------------------------- Async  
03 Link Description------------------------------ Async link 1  
04*Link state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled  
05+Port speed------------------------------------------------------------- 9600  
06*Port Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------8  
07*Port Stop Bits (1, 2)------------------------------------------------------1  
08*Port Parity (None, Odd, Even)-------------------------------------------None  
09*Flow Control (None, XonXoff)-----------------------------------------XonXoff  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Link Menu.  
2. For SW Flow Control, select None or XonXoff.  
This example displays SW Flow Control set to XonXoff.  
Async Link Menu  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................. Async link 1  
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Enabled]  
AsyncPPP  
Disabled  
ModMux  
Link Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port speed (in bits per second):  
[Async]  
300  
Autobaud  
1200  
2400  
4800  
[9600]  
19.2K  
38.4K  
57.6K  
Seven  
115.2K  
Port data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Eight]  
[One]  
Even  
Two  
Odd  
[XonXoff]  
Port parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
SW Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[None]  
None  
Link Description  
Description  
This menu item defines a description for a link.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
Async, AsyncPPP, and ModMux  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.  
2. For 03 Link Description, enter 3,and a description associated with the link.  
Maximum length is 30 characters.  
This example displays 03 Link Description set to New Async Link.  
>3,New Async Link  
Menu 4.2.14.12  
01 Link Number (1-32)--------------------------------------------------------03  
02*Link Type (Async, AsyncPPP, ModMux)--------------------------------- Async  
New Async Link  
03 Link Description------------------------------  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Link Menu.  
2. For Link Description, enter a description associated with the link. Maximum length  
is 30 characters.  
This example displays Link Description set to New Async Link.  
Async Link Menu  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................ New Async Link  
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Link Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [Async]  
[Enabled]  
AsyncPPP  
Disabled  
ModMux  
Link Number  
Description  
This menu item defines the number of the link being configured.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
Async, AsyncPPP, and ModMux  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.  
2. For 01 Link number, enter 1,and the link number. The default is 1.  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
This example displays 01 Link number set to 3.  
>1,3  
Menu 4.2.14.12  
01 Link Number (1-32)--------------------------------------------------------03  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Link Menu.  
2. For Link to configure, enter the link number. The default is 1.  
This example displays Link to configure set to 3.  
Async Link Menu  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Link State  
Description  
This menu item enables or disables a link.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
Async, AsyncPPP, and ModMux  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.  
2. For 04*Link state, enter 4to select Enabled or Disabled. The default is Enabled.  
This example displays 04*Link state set to Disabled.  
>4  
Menu 4.2.14.12  
01 Link Number (1-32)--------------------------------------------------------03  
02*Link Type (Async, AsyncPPP, ModMux)--------------------------------- Async  
03 Link Description------------------------------ Async link 3  
04*Link state (Enabled, Disabled)--------------------------------------Disabled  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Link Menu.  
2. For Link state, select Enabled or Disabled. The default is Disabled.  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
This example displays Link state set to Disabled.  
Async Link Menu  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................. Async link 3  
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Enabled  
[Disabled]  
Link Type  
Description  
This menu item defines the type of link as asynchronous, asynchronous PPP, or  
ModMux. Refer to section AI232 Link Types on page 5-2 for more information about  
link types.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
Async, AsyncPPP, and ModMux  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.  
2. For 02*Link Type, enter 2to select Async, AsyncPPP, or ModMux. The default is Async.  
This example displays 02*Link Type set to ModMux.  
>2  
Menu 4.2.14.12  
01 Link Number (1-32)--------------------------------------------------------01  
02*Link Type (Async, AsyncPPP, ModMux)--------------------------------- ModMux  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Link Menu.  
2. For Link Type, select Async, AsyncPPP, or ModMux. The default is Async.  
This example displays Link Type set to ModMux.  
Modem Mux Link Menu  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................. Async link 3  
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Link Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Async  
Enabled  
AsyncPPP  
[Disabled]  
[ModMux]  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
Port Data Bits  
Description  
This menu item defines the number of databits in a data byte.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
Async and AsyncPPP  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.  
2. For 06*Port Data Bits, enter 6to select 7 or 8. The default is 8.  
This example displays 06*Port Data Bits set to 7.  
>6  
Menu 4.2.14.12  
01 Link Number (1-32)--------------------------------------------------------01  
02*Link Type (Async, AsyncPPP, ModMux)--------------------------------- Async  
03 Link Description------------------------------ Async link 1  
04*Link state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled  
05+Port speed------------------------------------------------------------- 9600  
06*Port Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------7  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. For Port data bits, select Seven or Eight. The default is Eight.  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
This example displays Port data bits set to Seven.  
Async Link Menu  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................ New Async Link  
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Enabled]  
AsyncPPP  
Disabled  
ModMux  
Link Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port speed (in bits per second):  
[Async]  
38.4K  
300  
Autobaud  
1200  
2400  
4800  
[9600]  
19.2K  
57.6K  
Seven  
115.2K  
Port data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Eight]  
Two  
[Odd]  
[One]  
Even  
None  
Port Parity  
Description  
This menu item defines parity, which is a process for detecting whether or not bits of  
data have been altered during data transmission.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
Async and AsyncPPP  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.  
2. For 08*Port Parity, enter 8to select None, Odd, or Even. The default is None.  
This example displays 08*Port Parity set to Odd.  
>8  
Menu 4.2.14.12  
01 Link Number (1-32)--------------------------------------------------------01  
02*Link Type (Async, AsyncPPP, ModMux)--------------------------------- Async  
03 Link Description------------------------------ Async link 1  
04*Link state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled  
05+Port speed------------------------------------------------------------- 9600  
06*Port Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------8  
07*Port Stop Bits (1, 2)------------------------------------------------------1  
08*Port Parity (None, Odd, Even)------------------------------------------- Odd  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. For Port parity, select None, Even, or Odd. The default is None.  
5-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
This example displays Port parity set to Odd.  
Async Link Menu  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................. Async link 3  
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Enabled  
AsyncPPP  
[Disabled]  
ModMux  
Link Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port speed (in bits per second):  
[Async]  
300  
Autobaud  
Port data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . None  
1200  
2400  
4800  
[9600]  
19.2K  
38.4K  
57.6K  
115.2K  
Seven  
[Eight]  
Two  
[Odd]  
[One]  
Even  
Port Speed  
Description  
This menu item defines the baud rate for a port.  
Menu Item Type  
Data in the AI232 local menu system  
Link Type Availability  
Async, AsyncPPP, and ModMux  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.  
2. For Port speed, enter the associated item number.  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
Menu 4.2.14.12.5 appears.  
>5  
Menu 4.2.14.12.5  
01 300  
Baud  
02 1200 Baud  
03 2400 Baud  
04 4800 Baud  
05 9600 Baud  
06 19200 Baud  
07 38400 Baud  
08 57600 Baud  
09 115200 Baud  
10 Auto Baud  
ꢀ
Note: 10 Auto Baud is not available for AsyncPPP or ModMux.  
3. Enter a value from 1to 10to select the port speed. Menu 4.2.14.12 reappears  
with the new port speed selection.  
This example displays 05+Port speed set to 4800.  
>4  
Menu 4.2.14.12  
01 Link Number (1-32)--------------------------------------------------------01  
02*Link Type (Async, AsyncPPP, ModMux)---------------------------------  
Async  
03 Link Description------------------------------ Async link 1  
04*Link state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled  
05+Port speed------------------------------------------------------------- 4800  
5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Link Menu.  
2. For Port speed, select 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K, 57.6K, 115.2K, or  
Autobaud. The default is 9600.  
This example displays Port speed set to 4800.  
Async Link Menu  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................ New Async Link  
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Enabled]  
AsyncPPP  
Disabled  
ModMux  
Link Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port speed (in bits per second):  
[Async]  
19.2K 38.4K  
300 1200  
Autobaud  
2400  
[4800]  
9600  
57.6K  
115.2K  
Port Stop Bits  
Description  
This menu item defines the number of stop bits. A stop bit is an extra bit at the end of  
an asynchronous character that helps the receiver recognize the end of the character.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
Async and AsyncPPP  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.  
2. For 07*Port Stop Bits, enter 7to select 1 or 2. The default is 1.  
This example displays 07*Port Stop Bits set to 2.  
>7  
Menu 4.2.14.12  
01 Link Number (1-32)--------------------------------------------------------01  
02*Link Type (Async, AsyncPPP, ModMux)--------------------------------- Async  
03 Link Description------------------------------ Async link 1  
04*Link state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled  
05+Port speed------------------------------------------------------------- 9600  
06*Port Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------8  
07*Port Stop Bits (1, 2)------------------------------------------------------2  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. For Port stop bits, select One or Two. The default is One.  
This example displays Port stop bits set to Two.  
Async Link Menu  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................ New Async Link  
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Enabled]  
AsyncPPP  
Disabled  
ModMux  
Link Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port speed (in bits per second):  
[Async]  
38.4K  
300 1200  
Autobaud  
2400  
[4800]  
9600  
19.2K  
57.6K  
115.2K  
Port data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Seven  
[Eight]  
[Two]  
One  
Xon Repeat Interval  
Description  
This menu item enables or disables the XON repeat interval. When enabled, AI232  
sends multiple XON characters at the specified interval. Some equipment requires the  
receipt of multiple XONs before sending data after it has received an XOFF.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
Async, AsyncPPP, and ModMux  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.  
2. For 10 Xon Repeat interval, enter 10,and a interval value. The default is 0.  
5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General Link Properties Configuration  
This example displays 10 Xon Repeat interval set to 30.  
>10,30  
Menu 4.2.14.12  
01 Link Number (1-32)--------------------------------------------------------03  
02*Link Type (Async, AsyncPPP, ModMux)--------------------------------- Async  
03 Link Description------------------------------ New Async Link  
04*Link state (Enabled, Disabled)-------------------------------------- Enabled  
05+Port speed------------------------------------------------------------- 4800  
06*Port Data Bits (7, 8)------------------------------------------------------8  
07*Port Stop Bits (1, 2)------------------------------------------------------2  
08*Port Parity (None, Odd, Even)------------------------------------------- Odd  
09*Flow Control (None, XonXoff)----------------------------------------- None  
10 Xon Repeat interval (0 - 120s with 0 = no repeat)------------------------030  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. For XON Repeat Interval, enter a interval value. The default is 0.  
This example displays XON Repeat Interval set to 30.  
Async Link Menu  
Link to configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Link Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................ New Async Link  
Link state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Enabled]  
AsyncPPP  
Disabled  
ModMux  
Link Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port speed (in bits per second):  
[Async]  
300  
Autobaud  
1200  
2400  
4800  
[9600]  
19.2K  
38.4K  
57.6K  
Seven  
115.2K  
Port data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Port stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Eight]  
[One]  
Even  
[None]  
Two  
Odd  
XonXoff  
Port parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
SW Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[None]  
XON Repeat Interval (0 - 120s with 0 = no repeat) . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General PPP Properties Configuration  
General PPP Properties Configuration  
The following menu items are available for PPP configuration:  
z
z
z
IPCP Address Settings  
Maximum Unit Settings  
Network Control Protocol  
IPCP Address Settings  
Description  
The IPCP address settings are configured using three menu items:  
z Local IP address—Defines a valid local IP address for AI232.  
z Remote IP address—Defines an IP address for the remote device.  
z Subnet mask—Defines a subnet mask for the link.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
AsyncPPP and ModMux  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Do one of the following:  
z
z
For an asynchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.14.12-2.2.  
For a ModMux link, access Menu 4.2.14.12.10.  
2. For 01*Network Control Protocol, enter 1to select IPCP. The default is IPCP.  
3. For 02 Local IP Address, enter 2,and the IP address. Entering 0.0.0.0 specifies  
that the remote device will assign the IP address for AI232. The default is 0.0.0.0.  
4. For 03 Remote IP Address, enter 3,and the IP address. Entering 0.0.0.0 specifies  
that the remote device will assign its own IP address. The default is 0.0.0.0.  
5. For 04 Subnet Mask, enter 4,and the subnet mask. The default is 255.255.255.240.  
5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General PPP Properties Configuration  
This example displays:  
z 01*Network Control Protocol set to IPCP  
z 02 Local IP Address set to 099.045.006.033  
z 03 Remote IP Address set to 106.046.092.004  
z 04 Subnet Mask set to 255.255.255.000.  
>4,255.255.255.000  
Menu 4.2.14.12-2.2  
01*Network Control Protocol (IPCP, BCP)------------------------------------IPCP  
02 Local IP Address---------------------------------------------099.045.006.033  
03 Remote IP Address--------------------------------------------106.046.092.004  
04 Subnet Mask--------------------------------------------------255.255.255.000  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the AsyncPPP or ModMux Link Menu.  
2. Select PPP Configuration Menu. The PPP Configuration Menu appears.  
3. For Local IP address, enter the IP address. Entering 0.0.0.0 specifies that the  
remote device will assign the IP address for AI232. The default is 0.0.0.0.  
4. For Remote IP address, enter the IP address. Entering 0.0.0.0 specifies that the  
remote device will assign its own IP address. The default is 0.0.0.0.  
5. For Subnet Mask, enter the subnet mask. The default is 255.255.255.240.  
This example displays:  
z Local IP address set to 23.230.34.5  
z Remote IP address set to 23.230.34.6  
z Subnet Mask set to 255.255.255.000.  
PPP Configuration Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3
Network Control Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
IPCP Address Parameters  
[IPCP]  
BCP  
Local IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 23.230.34.5  
Remote IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 23.230.34.6  
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255.255.255.000  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General PPP Properties Configuration  
Maximum Unit Settings  
Description  
The maximum unit settings are configured using two menu items:  
z Maximum receive unit (MRU)—Defines the maximum number of bytes that can be  
received in a single packet.  
z Maximum transmit unit (MTU)—Defines the maximum number of bytes that can be  
transmitted in a single packet.  
ꢀ
Note: During LCP negotiations on a PPP link, AI232 will advertise the MRU  
configured by the user. If the peer negotiates its MRU with AI232, then the  
MTU on the AI232 side will be set to the peer’s MRU. If the peer does not  
negotiate its MRU, then the MTU on the AI232 side will be set to the value  
configured by the user.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
AsyncPPP and ModMux  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Do one of the following:  
z
z
For an asynchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.14.12-2.2.  
For a ModMux link, access Menu 4.2.14.12.10.  
2. For 05 Maximum Receive Unit, enter 5,and the byte value. The defaults are 1518 for  
network control protocol BCP and 1500 for network control protocol IPCP.  
3. For 06 Maximum Transmit Unit, enter 6,and the byte value. The defaults are 1518for  
network control protocol BCP and 1500 for network control protocol IPCP.  
This example displays 05 Maximum Receive Unitset to 1000and 06 Maximum Transmit Unit  
set to 900.  
>6,900  
Menu 4.2.14.12-2.2  
01*Network Control Protocol (IPCP, BCP)------------------------------------ BCP  
02 Local IP Address---------------------------------------------000.000.000.000  
03 Remote IP Address--------------------------------------------000.000.000.000  
04 Subnet Mask--------------------------------------------------255.255.255.240  
05 Maximum Receive Unit (128-1568)-----------------------------------------1000  
06 Maximum Transmit Unit (64-1600)-----------------------------------------0900  
5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General PPP Properties Configuration  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the AsyncPPP or ModMux Link Menu.  
2. Select PPP Configuration Menu. The PPP Configuration Menu appears.  
3. For Maximum Receive Unit, enter the byte value. The defaults are 1518 for network  
control protocol BCP and 1500 for network control protocol IPCP.  
4. For Maximum Transmit Unit, enter the byte value. The defaults are 1518 for network  
control protocol BCP and 1500 for network control protocol IPCP.  
This example displays Maximum Receive Unitset to 1000and Maximum Transmit Unitset to  
900 for an IPCP network control protocol.  
PPP Configuration Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3
Network Control Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
IPCP Address Parameters  
[IPCP]  
BCP  
Local IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... 0.0.0.0  
Remote IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... 0.0.0.0  
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255.255.255.240  
Maximum Receive Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000  
Maximum Transmit Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900  
Network Control Protocol  
Description  
This menu item defines the network control protocol as BCP or IPCP. BCP configures,  
enables, and disables bridge protocol modules on both ends of a PPP link. IPCP  
configures, enables, and disables IP protocol modules on both ends of a PPP link.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
AsyncPPP and ModMux  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: General PPP Properties Configuration  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Do one of the following:  
z
z
For an asynchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.14.12-2.2.  
For a ModMux link, access Menu 4.2.14.12.10.  
2. For 01*Network Control Protocol, enter 1to select IPCP or BCP. The default is IPCP.  
This example displays 01*Network Control Protocol for an asynchronous PPP link set  
to BCP.  
>1  
Menu 4.2.14.12-2.2  
01*Network Control Protocol (IPCP, BCP)------------------------------------ BCP  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the AsyncPPP Link Menu or ModMux Link Menu.  
2. Select PPP Configuration Menu. The PPP Configuration Menu appears.  
3. For Network Control Protocol, select IPCP or BCP. The default is IPCP.  
This example displays Network Control Protocol set to IPCP.  
PPP Configuration Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3
Network Control Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[IPCP]  
BCP  
5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Modem Option Configuration  
Modem Option Configuration  
The following menu items are used for modem option configuration. They are  
available for asynchronous and asynchronous PPP links:  
z
z
z
Modem String  
Dialing Time-out Interval  
Number of Dial Attempts  
Modem String  
Description  
This menu item configures the modem string, which can be any of the following:  
z
z
z
The text sent to a port when an associated link starts or restarts following the  
termination of a call  
The dial string the link to uses to dial the modem automatically once it is  
enabled  
A command that places the modem in auto answer mode so that it is set to  
receive calls  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
Async and AsyncPPP  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.14.  
2. For 01 Modem string, enter 1,and the modem string. Maximum length is 80  
characters.  
This example displays 01 Modem string set to 6145553003.  
>1,6145553003  
Menu 4.2.14.12.14  
01 Modem string------------------------------------------------------6145553003  
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Modem Option Configuration  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. Select Modem Setup Menu. The Modem Setup Menu appears.  
3. For Modem string, enter the modem string.  
This example displays Modem string set to 6145552002.  
Modem Setup Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3
Modem string . . . . . . . . . . . . .............................. 6145552002  
Dialing Time-out Interval  
Description  
This menu item configures the amount of time in seconds that the modem waits  
before redialing a call when connection is not initially established.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
Async and AsyncPPP  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.14.  
2. For 02 Dialing time-out, enter 2,and the timeout value. The default is 30.  
This example displays 02 Dialing time-out set to 10.  
>2,10  
Menu 4.2.14.12.14  
01 Modem string------------------------------------------------------6145553003  
02 Dialing time-out (5 - 300 s)---------------------------------------------010  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. Select Modem Setup Menu. The Modem Setup Menu appears.  
3. For Dialing time-out, enter the time out value. The default is 30.  
5-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Modem Option Configuration  
This example displays Dialing time-out set to 10.  
Modem Setup Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3
Modem string . . . . . . . . . . . . .............................. 6145552002  
Dialing time-out (5 - 300 s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Number of Dial Attempts  
Description  
This menu item configures the number of times the modem redials before terminating  
a call.  
Menu Item Type  
Data  
Link Type Availability  
Async and AsyncPPP  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Access Menu 4.2.14.12.14.  
2. For 03 Number of dial attempts, enter 3,and the number of redial attempts. The  
default is 3.  
This example displays 03 Number of dial attempts set to 15.  
>3,15  
Menu 4.2.14.12.14  
01 Modem string------------------------------------------------------6145553003  
02 Dialing time-out (5 - 300 s)---------------------------------------------010  
03 Number of dial attempts (0 - 100, 0 = continuous retry)------------------015  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. Select Modem Setup Menu. The Modem Setup Menu appears.  
3. For Number of dial attempts, enter the number of redial attempts. The default is 3.  
5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: Modem Option Configuration  
This example displays Number of dial attempts set to 15.  
Modem Setup Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3
Modem string . . . . . . . . . . . . .............................. 6145552002  
Dialing time-out (5 - 300 s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Number of dial attempts (0 - 100, 0 = continuous retry) . . . . . . . . . . 15  
5-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: PPP Authentication Configuration  
PPP Authentication Configuration  
The following menu items are available for PPP authentication configuration:  
z
z
z
Local Authentication Settings  
RAS Option  
Remote Authentication Settings  
Local Authentication Settings  
Description  
The local authentication settings are configured using three menu items:  
z Local authentication method—Defines the local authentication method as one of  
the following options:  
z PAP—Specifies the method that uses a two-way handshake that is done only  
upon initial link establishment.  
z CHAP—Specifies the method that verifies the identity of the peer using a three-  
way handshake that is done upon initial link establishment. Verification may  
be repeated any time after the link has been established. CHAP also encrypts  
the user’s password over the PPP link to provide added security.  
z None—Specifies no authentication will be used.  
z Local PAP/CHAP identity—Defines the user name for local PAP/CHAP  
authentication.  
z Local PAP password/CHAP secret—Defines the password for local PAP/CHAP  
authentication.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle for local authentication method  
Data for local PAP/CHAP identity and local PAP password/CHAP secret  
Link Type Availability  
AsyncPPP and ModMux  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Do one of the following:  
z
z
For an asynchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.14.12-2.1.  
For a ModMux link, access Menu 4.2.14.12.9.  
5-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: PPP Authentication Configuration  
2. For 02*Local Authentication Method, enter 2to select None, PAP, or CHAP. The default is  
None.  
3. For 03 Local PAP/CHAP identity, enter 3,and the user name. Maximum length is 24  
characters. The default is applied.  
4. For 04 Local PAP Password/CHAP Secret, enter 4,and the password. Maximum  
length is 24 characters. The default is applied.  
This example displays:  
z 02*Local Authentication Method set to PAP  
z 03 Local PAP/CHAP identity set to bri24  
z 04 Local PAP Password/CHAP Secret set to documentation.  
>4,documentation  
Menu 4.2.14.12.9  
01*RAS Option (DISABLED,RADIUS,RADIUS_FB,TACACS,TACACS_FB)------------ DISABLED  
02*Local Authentication Method (None, PAP, CHAP)--------------------------- PAP  
03 Local PAP/CHAP identity-----------------------------  
04 Local PAP Password/CHAP Secret----------------------  
bri24  
documentation  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the AsyncPPP Link Menu or ModMux Link Menu.  
2. Select PPP Authentication Menu. The PPP Authentication Menu appears.  
3. For Local Authentication Method, select None, PAP, or CHAP. The default is None.  
4. For Local PAP/CHAP Identity, enter the user name. The default is applied.  
5. For Local PAP Password/CHAP Secret, enter the password. The default is applied.  
This example displays:  
z Local Authentication Method set to CHAP  
z Local PAP/CHAP Identity set to bri24  
z Local PAP Password/CHAP Secret set to documentation.  
PPP Authentication Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Authentication Options  
3
Local Authentication Method . . . . . . . . . . . .  
RAS Option: Disabled RADIUS [RADIUS/Fallback]  
Local PAP/CHAP Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............. bri24  
Local PAP Password/CHAP Secret . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... documentation  
None  
PAP  
[CHAP]  
5-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: PPP Authentication Configuration  
RAS Option  
Description  
This menu item configures the method AI232 uses to obtain ID and password  
information for a link. The following options are available:  
z
Disabling RAS causes AI232 to use local ID and password information to validate  
the ID and password sent from a remote device.  
z
Enabling RADIUS causes AI232 to use the ID and password information  
configured in the RADIUS server to validate the ID and password sent from the  
remote device.  
z
Enabling RADIUS with fallback causes AI232 to attempt to use the ID and  
password information configured in the RADIUS server to validate the ID and  
password sent from the remote device. If neither of the RADIUS servers respond,  
AI232 uses the local ID and password (configured in the PPP Authentication  
Menu) for validation.  
z
z
Enabling TACACS+ causes AI232 to use the ID and password information  
configured in the TACACS+ server to validate the ID and password sent from the  
remote device.  
Enabling TACACS+ with fallback causes AI232 to attempt to use the ID and  
password information configured in the TACACS+ server to validate the ID and  
password sent from the remote device. If neither of the TACACS+ servers  
respond, AI232 uses the local ID and password (entered in the PPP  
Authentication Menu) for validation.  
ꢀ
Notes: When connecting to a remote PPP device, ensure that the PPP  
authentication timeout on that device is set to a minimum of 30 seconds. If  
the network latency is high, set that value to a higher number of seconds.  
ꢀ The TACACS+ server used must support version 1.78 or later of the  
TACACS+ protocol.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
AsyncPPP and ModMux  
5-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: PPP Authentication Configuration  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Do one of the following:  
z
z
For an asynchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.14.12-2.1.  
For a ModMux link, access Menu 4.2.14.12.9.  
2. For 01*RAS Option, enter 1to select DISABLED, RADIUS, RADIUS_FB, TACACS, or TACACS_FB.  
The default is DISABLED.  
This example displays 01*RAS Option set to TACACS for an asynchronous PPP link.  
>1  
Menu 4.2.14.12-2.1  
TACACS  
01*RAS Option (DISABLED,RADIUS,RADIUS_FB,TACACS,TACACS_FB)------------  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
To configure RADIUS PPP authentication:  
1. Access the AsyncPPP Link Menu or ModMux Link Menu.  
2. Select PPP Authentication Menu. The PPP Authentication Menu appears.  
3. For RAS Option, select Disabled, RADIUS, or RADIUS/Fallback. The default is Disabled.  
This example displays RAS Option set to RADIUS/Fallback.  
PPP Authentication Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Authentication Options  
3
Local Authentication Method . . . . . . . . . . . .  
RAS Option: Disabled RADIUS [RADIUS/Fallback]  
None  
PAP  
[CHAP]  
Tip: To configure TACACS+ PPP authentication on AI232, use shell command aaa  
authen on page 8-7.  
5-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: PPP Authentication Configuration  
Remote Authentication Settings  
Description  
The remote authentication settings are configured using three menu items:  
z Remote authentication method—Defines the remote authentication method as one  
of the following options:  
z PAP specifies the method that uses a two-way handshake that is done only  
upon initial link establishment.  
z CHAP specifies the method that verifies the identity of the peer by using a  
three-way handshake that is done upon initial link establishment. Verification  
may be repeated any time after the link has been established. CHAP also  
encrypts the user’s password over the PPP link to provide added security.  
z None specifies no authentication will be used.  
z Remote PAP/CHAP identity—Defines the user name for remote PAP/CHAP  
authentication.  
z Remote PAP password/CHAP secret—Defines the password for remote PAP/CHAP  
authentication.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle for remote authentication method  
Data for remote PAP/CHAP identity and remote PAP password/CHAP secret  
Link Type Availability  
AsyncPPP and ModMux  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Do one of the following:  
z
z
For an asynchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.14.12-2.1.  
For a ModMux link, access Menu 4.2.14.12.9.  
2. For 05*Remote Authentication Method, enter 5to select None, PAP, or CHAP. The default  
is None.  
3. For 06 Remote PAP/CHAP identity, enter 6,and the user name. The default is  
applied.  
4. For 07 Remote PAP Password/CHAP Secret, enter 7,and the password. The default is  
applied.  
5-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: PPP Authentication Configuration  
This example displays:  
z 05*Remote Authentication Method set to CHAP  
z 06 Remote PAP/CHAP identity set to bri24  
z 07 Remote PAP Password/CHAP Secret set to documentation.  
>7,documentation  
Menu 4.2.14.12.9  
01*RAS Option (DISABLED,RADIUS,RADIUS_FB,TACACS,TACACS_FB)------------ DISABLED  
02*Local Authentication Method (None, PAP, CHAP)--------------------------- PAP  
03 Local PAP/CHAP identity-----------------------------  
04 Local PAP Password/CHAP Secret----------------------  
05*Remote Authentication Method (None, PAP, CHAP)--------------------------CHAP  
bri24  
documentation  
06 Remote PAP/CHAP identity----------------------------  
07 Remote PAP Password/CHAP Secret---------------------  
bri24  
documentation  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the AsyncPPP or ModMux Link Menu.  
2. Select PPP Authentication Menu. The PPP Authentication Menu appears.  
3. For Remote Authentication Method, select None, PAP, or CHAP. The default is None.  
4. For Remote PAP/CHAP Identity, enter the user name. The default is applied.  
5. For Remote PAP Password/CHAP Secret, enter the password. The default is applied.  
This example displays:  
z Remote Authentication Method set to CHAP  
z Remote PAP/CHAP Identity set to bri24  
z Remote PAP Password/CHAP Secret set to documentation.  
PPP Authentication Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Authentication Options  
3
Local Authentication Method . . . . . . . . . . . .  
RAS Option: Disabled RADIUS [RADIUS/Fallback]  
Local PAP/CHAP Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............. bri24  
Local PAP Password/CHAP Secret . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... documentation  
None  
PAP  
[CHAP]  
Remote Authentication Method . . . . . . . . . . . .  
None  
PAP  
[CHAP]  
Remote PAP/CHAP Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............. bri24  
Remote PAP Password/CHAP Secret . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... documentation  
5-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: RTS/DTR Lead Control Configuration  
RTS/DTR Lead Control Configuration  
The following configuration items are available for RTS and DTR lead control  
configuration:  
z
z
DTR State Configuration  
RTS State Configuration  
DTR State Configuration  
Description  
DTR is an RS-232 signal sent from a computer or terminal to a modem that indicates  
that it (the computer or terminal) is able to accept data. DTR lead control is configured  
using two menu items:  
z DTR connect state—Sets the DTR connect state to ON or OFF. ON sets DTR to on  
while the link is connecting and while it is connected. OFF turns this functionality  
off.  
z DTR disconnect state—Sets the DTR disconnect state to one of the following  
options:  
z ON—Sets DTR to on when the link disconnects.  
z OFF—Sets DTR to off when the link disconnects.  
z TOGGLE—Makes DTR pulse when the link disconnects. The pulse polarity is  
opposite to the sense specified for the connected state.  
ꢀ
Note: The RTS/DTR lead control options only take effect when the link is configured  
as a destination link.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
Async and AsyncPPP  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. For an asynchronous or asynchronous PPP link, access Menu 4.2.14.12.13.  
2. For 01*DTR connect state, enter 1to select ON or OFF. The default is ON.  
3. For 02*DTR disconnect state, enter 2to select ON, OFF, or TOGGLE. The default is OFF.  
5-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: RTS/DTR Lead Control Configuration  
This example displays 01*DTR connect state set to OFF and 02*DTR disconnect state set  
to TOGGLE.  
>2  
Menu 4.2.14.12.13  
01*DTR connect state---------------------------------------------------------ON  
02*DTR disconnect state (On, Off, Toggle)--------------------------------TOGGLE  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. Select RTS/DTR Lead Control Options Menu. The RTS/DTR Lead Control Options  
Menu appears.  
3. For DTR connect state, select On or Off. The default is On.  
4. For DTR disconnect state, select On, Off, or Toggle. The default is Off.  
This example displays DTR connect state set to Off and DTR disconnect state set to  
Toggle.  
RTS/DTR Control Options Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3
DTR connect state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
DTR disconnect state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On  
On [Off]  
[Toggle]  
Off  
RTS State Configuration  
Description  
RTS is an RS-232 signal that is sent from a transmitting terminal to a receiving  
terminal to request permission to transmit. It is configured using the following menu  
items:  
RTS connect state—Sets the RTS connect state to one of the following options:  
z On—Sets RTS to on when the link is connecting or connected.  
z Off—Sets RTS to off when the link is connecting or connected.  
z FlowControl—Enables RTS to follow the hardware flow control convention.  
5-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: RTS/DTR Lead Control Configuration  
RTS disconnect state—Sets the RTS disconnect state to one of the following options:  
z On—Sets RTS to on when the link disconnects.  
z Off—Sets RTS to off when the link disconnects.  
z Toggle—Makes RTS pulse when the link disconnects. The pulse polarity is  
opposite to the sense specified for the connected state.  
Menu Item Type  
Toggle  
Link Type Availability  
Async and AsyncPPP  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. For an asynchronous or asynchronous PPP link, access menu 4.2.14.12.13.  
2. For 03*RTS connect state, enter 3to select ON, OFF, or FLOW CONTROL. The default is ON.  
3. For 04*RTS disconnect state, enter 4to select ON, OFF, or TOGGLE. The default is OFF.  
This example displays 03*RTS connect state set to FLOW CONTROL and 04*RTS disconnect  
state set to TOGGLE.  
>4  
Menu 4.2.14.12.13  
01*DTR connect state---------------------------------------------------------ON  
02*DTR disconnect state (On, Off, Toggle)-----------------------------------OFF  
03*RTS connect state (On, Off, Flow Control)-----------------------FLOW CONTROL  
04*RTS disconnect state (On, Off, Toggle)--------------------------------TOGGLE  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
1. Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu.  
2. Select RTS/DTR Lead Control Options Menu. The RTS/DTR Lead Control Options  
Menu appears.  
3. For RTS connect state, select On, Off, or FlowControl. The default is On.  
4. For RTS disconnect state, select On, Off, or Toggle. The default is Off.  
5-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Link Configuration: RTS/DTR Lead Control Configuration  
This example displays RTS connect stateset to FlowControland RTS disconnect stateset  
to Toggle.  
RTS/DTR Control Options Menu  
Link being configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
DTR connect state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On  
3
[Off]  
[Toggle]  
DTR disconnect state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
RTS connect state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
RTS disconnect state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
[FlowControl]  
Off [Toggle]  
5-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
TID Multiplexing  
This chapter provides information on configuring TID multiplexing.  
Guide to this Chapter  
Overview  
TID Multiplexing Configuration  
TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: Overview  
Overview  
AI232 supports TID multiplexing, which enables a single call from an OSS to fan out  
into multiple calls to various NEs. The initiating call may be asynchronous or TCP, but  
cannot originate from a destination menu. Refer to Figure 6-1 for an illustration of TID  
multiplexing.  
TID1  
TID2  
TID3  
NEs  
TID1  
TID2  
TID3  
TID1  
TID2  
TID3  
TID4  
TID5  
TID6  
Network  
AI232  
OSS  
TID4  
TID5  
TID6  
TID4  
TID5  
NEs  
TID6  
Figure 6-1 TID Multiplexing Overview  
In Figure 6-1, AI232 takes a single call from an OSS and routes TL1 commands to  
various NEs by means of the TID in the TL1 command. Similarly, AI232 receives TL1  
responses and NE reporting messages from several NEs and routes these messages  
to the appropriate OSS. The call to AI232 from the OSS is a parent call. The calls  
from AI232 to the various NEs are children calls.  
After receiving a TL1 command from the OSS, AI232 checks to see if there is an  
existing connection for each TID. If a connection to the appropriate NE is already  
established, then AI232 forwards the TL1 command to the NE as specified by the TID.  
The following characteristics apply to AI232 when it attempts to connect to an NE:  
z
z
z
If AI232 is unable to establish a connection to an NE, it will buffer the TL1  
command and try to reconnect within 2 seconds.  
AI232 tries to connect up to three times if it cannot immediately establish a  
connection.  
AI232 buffers only one TL1 command for each NE. If a connection is made, AI232  
forwards the buffered command to the NE.  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: Overview  
z
z
If a connection is not established after four tries or if AI232 receives a TL1  
command with an unknown TID, the TL1 command gets discarded and a  
message gets logged.  
If the OSS is disconnected from AI232, all associated children calls to the NEs are  
disconnected.  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration  
TID Multiplexing Configuration  
Establish TID multiplexing by configuring aliases for calls that will go through AI232.  
Configure a parent alias to accept the incoming call from the OSS. After doing this,  
configure children aliases to route calls to the various network elements. For more  
information about aliases, refer to Chapter 7: Alias and Call Routing Configuration.  
Configuring the Parent Alias  
ꢀ
Note: AI recommends that you do not use connect-on-activity PVCs to establish a  
parent connection.  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
1. Log in to AI198.  
2. At the prompt, enter menuto access the Main Menu.  
3. For 08+Configure the alias translation table, enter 8. The alias configuration  
menu appears.  
>8  
Menu 8  
01 Alias name -****************************************************************  
02+Simple alias translation  
03 Destination -  
04 Called address -  
05 This alias is visible in the destination menu-----------------------------NO  
06 Link number is (1..16) -  
07 Caller's address -  
08 Call data -  
09 App. string -  
10 Called protocol -  
11 Caller's protocol -  
12 Alternate routing alias -  
14+Test macros  
15 Show entire alias  
16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table  
17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table  
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table  
19+Delete the above alias translation entry  
20 Save the changes made (20b: to the beginning, 20e: to the end)  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
4. For 01 Alias name, enter the alias name for the call coming from the OSS.  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration  
5. For 02+Simple alias translation, enter 2. Menu 8.2 appears with the available  
translation options.  
>2  
Menu 8.2  
01 Simple alias translation  
02 Multiplexed connection  
03 Multiplexed only translation  
04 SLC routing translation  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
6. For 04 SLC routing translation, enter 4. Menu 8 reappears with SLC routing  
translation selected for menu item 2.  
7. If you are using single alias translation, for 03 Destination, enter 3,and the IP  
address of AI232.  
8. For 08 Call data, enter 8,and the parent name.  
ꢀ
Note: When creating the parent name, note that you use the parent name to  
make the children alias names. For example, if a parent is named  
PARENT1, valid child names would be PARENT1.1 and PARENT1.2.  
9. For 09 App. string, enter:  
TMUXn [ TID:tid_for_AI232 ]  
n
Defines the maximum number of children connections. Valid  
values are 1 to 128.  
tid_for_AI232  
Defines the terminal identifier for AI232.  
10. For 10 Called protocol, enter 10,=""  
11. (optional) For 11 Caller's protocol, enter 11,and the caller's protocol.  
12. Save your changes.  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
ꢀ
Note: To configure aliases in the AI232 local menu system, AI232 must be in  
standalone mode.  
1. Log in to the AI232 Main Menu.  
2. From the AI232 Main Menu, select Alias Menu. The Alias Summary Menu appears.  
3. From the Alias Summary Menu, select Add Alias. The Alias Edit Menu appears.  
Alias Edit Menu  
Alias Name . . . . .  
Destination . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Address . . .......................................................  
Called Address . . . .......................................................  
Call Data . . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Protocol . .......................................................  
Called Protocol . . .......................................................  
Application String . .......................................................  
Alternate Route . . .......................................................  
Description . . . . .......................................................  
Display Alias in Destination Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Alias Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Yes]  
No  
[End]  
Beginning  
+ Alias Test Menu  
Range: {255 characters}  
<Ctrl-R> Return to Main Menu  
<F1> Help <F2> Send  
<F4> Close  
4. For Alias Name, enter the alias name for the call coming from the OSS.  
5. If you are using single alias translation, for Destination, enter the IP address of  
AI232. By entering a destination value, you are specifying the use of single alias  
translation.  
6. For Call data, enter the parent name.  
ꢀ
Note: When creating the parent name, note that you use the parent name to  
make the children alias names. For example, if a parent is named  
PARENT1, valid child names would be PARENT1.1 and PARENT1.2.  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration  
7. For Application string, enter:  
TMUXn [ TID:tid_for_AI232 ]  
n
Defines the maximum number of children connections. Valid  
values are 1 to 128.  
tid_for_AI232  
Defines the terminal identifier for AI232.  
8. For Called protocol, enter ="".  
9. (optional) For Caller's protocol, enter the caller's protocol.  
10. Save your changes.  
Configuring the Children Aliases  
Configuration in the AI198 Menu System  
AI232 supports a maximum of 512 child connections. These connections can be  
asynchronous or TCP/IP.  
To configure the child aliases:  
1. Log into AI198.  
2. At the prompt, enter menuto access the Main Menu.  
3. For 08+Configure the alias translation table, enter 8. The alias configuration  
menu appears.  
>8  
Menu 8  
01 Alias name -****************************************************************  
02+Simple alias translation  
03 Destination -  
04 Called address -  
05 This alias is visible in the destination menu-----------------------------NO  
06 Link number is (1..16) -  
07 Caller's address -  
08 Call data -  
09 App. string -  
10 Called protocol -  
11 Caller's protocol -  
12 Alternate routing alias -  
14+Test macros  
15 Show entire alias  
16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table  
17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table  
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table  
19+Delete the above alias translation entry  
20 Save the changes made (20b: to the beginning, 20e: to the end)  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration  
4. For 01 Alias name, enter:  
parent_name.m  
parent_name  
Defines the name you entered for 08 Call dataduring the parent  
alias configuration.  
m
Defines the child number. Valid values are 1 to n(specified  
during the parent alias configuration).  
5. For 02+Simple alias translation, enter 2. Menu 8.2 appears with the available  
translation options.  
>2  
Menu 8.2  
01 Simple alias translation  
02 Multiplexed connection  
03 Multiplexed only translation  
04 SLC routing translation  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
6. For 04 SLC routing translation, enter 4. Menu 8 re-appears with SLC routing  
translation selected for menu item 2.  
7. If you are using single alias translation, for 03 Destination, enter 3,and the IP  
address of AI232. By entering a destination value, you are specifying the use of  
single alias translation.  
8. For 04 Called address, enter 4,and the called address.  
9. For 07 Caller's address, enter 7,and the caller's address.  
10. For 08 Call data, enter 8,and the call data information.  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration  
11. For 09 App. string, enter:  
TID:tid  
tid  
Defines the TID of the destination NE. Maximum length is 20 characters.  
12. (optional) For 10 Called protocol, enter 10,and the called protocol.  
13. For 11 Caller's protocol, enter 11,="".  
Configuration in the AI232 Local Menu System  
ꢀ
Note: To configure aliases in the AI232 local menu system, AI232 must be in  
standalone mode.  
1. Log in to the AI232 Main Menu.  
2. From the AI232 Main Menu, select Alias Menu. The Alias Summary Menu appears.  
3. From the Alias Summary Menu, select Add Alias. The Alias Edit Menu appears.  
Alias Edit Menu  
Alias Name . . . . .  
Destination . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Address . . .......................................................  
Called Address . . . .......................................................  
Call Data . . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Protocol . .......................................................  
Called Protocol . . .......................................................  
Application String . .......................................................  
Alternate Route . . .......................................................  
Description . . . . .......................................................  
Display Alias in Destination Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Alias Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
[Yes]  
No  
[End]  
Beginning  
+ Alias Test Menu  
Range: {255 characters}  
<Ctrl-R> Return to Main Menu  
<F1> Help <F2> Send  
<F4> Close  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration  
4. For Alias name, enter:  
parent_name.m  
parent_name  
Defines the name you entered for 08 Call dataduring the parent  
alias configuration.  
m
Defines the child number. Valid values are 1 to n(specified  
during the parent alias configuration).  
5. If you are using single alias translation, for Destination, enter the IP address of  
AI232. By entering a destination value, you are specifying the use of single alias  
translation.  
6. For Called address, enter the called address.  
7. For Caller's address, enter the caller's address.  
8. For Call Data, enter the call data information.  
9. For Application String, enter:  
TID:tid  
tid  
Defines the TID of the destination NE. Maximum length is 20 characters.  
10. (optional) For Called protocol, enter the called protocol.  
11. For Caller's protocol, enter ="".  
12. Save your changes.  
Example Configurations  
The following screens display parent and child alias configurations that do the  
following:  
1. A call comes in on alias 172.16.30.61 at port 6001 (172.16.30.61#6001).  
2. The call fans out into two children calls. 09 App. string in the parent alias  
configuration determines the number of children; in this case, it is noted by TMUX2.  
The children have the following names: PARENT1.1and PARENT1.2. These names are  
established through 08 Call data in the parent alias configuration. The calls to the  
first and second child are PVCs.  
3. AI232 forwards all TL1 commands with TIDs NE-OH-COLUMBUS-1, NE-OH-COLUMBUS-2,  
and NE-OH-COLUMBUS-3 through the first child connection. It forwards all TL1  
commands with TIDs NE-OH-WORTHINGTON-1 and NE-OH-WORTHINGTON-2 through the  
second child connection.  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration  
This example displays the parent alias configuration in the AI198 menu system.  
>11 =""  
Menu 8  
01 Alias name ------------------------------------------------172.16.30.61#6001  
02+Simple alias translation  
03 Destination -  
04 Called address -  
05 This alias is visible in the destination menu----------------------------YES  
06 Link number is (1..16) -  
07 Caller's address -  
08 Call data -----------------------------------------------------------PARENT1  
09 App. string -----------------------------------------------------------TMUX2  
10 Called protocol ---------------------------------------------------------=""  
11 Caller's protocol -------------------------------------------------------=""  
12 Alternate routing alias -  
14+Test macros  
15 Show entire alias  
16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table  
17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table  
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table  
19+Delete the above alias translation entry  
20 Save the changes made (20b: to the beginning, 20e: to the end)  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration  
This example displays the parent alias configuration in the AI232 menu system.  
ꢀ
Note: To configure aliases in the AI232 local menu system, AI232 must be in  
standalone mode.  
Alias Edit Menu  
Alias Name . . . . . ..................................... 172.16.30.61#6001  
Destination . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Address . . .......................................................  
Called Address . . . .......................................................  
Call Data . . . . . ............................................... PARENT1  
Caller's Protocol . ................................................... =""  
Called Protocol . . ................................................... =""  
Application String . ................................................. TMUX2  
Alternate Route . . .......................................................  
Description . . . . .......................................................  
Display Alias in Destination Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
+ Alias Test Menu  
[Yes]  
No  
<F1> Help <F2> Send  
<F4> Close  
<Ctrl-R> Return to Main Menu  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration  
These examples display two of the child alias configurations in the AI198 menu  
system.  
>11 =""  
Menu 8  
01 Alias name --------------------------------------------------------PARENT1.1  
02+Simple alias translation  
03 Destination ----------------------------------------------------172.16.30.61  
04 Called address ----------------------------------------------------------PVC  
05 This alias is visible in the destination menu----------------------------YES  
06 Link number is (1..16) -  
07 Caller's address -  
08 Call data ----------------------------------------------------------ASY.29.1  
09 App. string --TID:NE-OH-COLUMBUS-1 TID:NE-OH-COLUMBUS-2 TID:NE-OH-COLUMBUS-3  
10 Called protocol ---------------------------------------------------------=""  
11 Caller's protocol -------------------------------------------------------=""  
12 Alternate routing alias -  
14+Test macros  
15 Show entire alias  
16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table  
17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table  
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table  
19+Delete the above alias translation entry  
20 Save the changes made (20b: to the beginning, 20e: to the end)  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
>11 =""  
Menu 8  
01 Alias name --------------------------------------------------------PARENT1.2  
02+Simple alias translation  
03 Destination ----------------------------------------------------172.16.30.61  
04 Called address ----------------------------------------------------------PVC  
05 This alias is visible in the destination menu----------------------------YES  
06 Link number is (1..16) -  
07 Caller's address -  
08 Call data ----------------------------------------------------------ASY.30.1  
09 App. string -----------------TID:NE-OH-WORTHINGTON-1 TID:NE-OH-WORTHINGTON-2  
10 Called protocol ---------------------------------------------------------=""  
11 Caller's protocol -------------------------------------------------------=""  
12 Alternate routing alias -  
14+Test macros  
15 Show entire alias  
16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table  
17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table  
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table  
19+Delete the above alias translation entry  
20 Save the changes made (20b: to the beginning, 20e: to the end)  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Configuration  
These examples display two of the child alias configurations in the AI232 menu  
system.  
ꢀ
Note: To configure aliases in the AI232 local menu system, AI232 must be in  
standalone mode.  
Alias Edit Menu  
Alias Name . . . . . ............................................. PARENT1.1  
Destination . . . . .......................................... 172.16.30.61  
Caller's Address . . .......................................................  
Called Address . . . ................................................... PVC  
Call Data . . . . . .............................................. ASY.29.1  
Caller's Protocol . ................................................... =""  
Called Protocol . . ................................................... =""  
Application String . TID:NE-OH-COLUMBUS-1 TID:NE-OH-COLUMBUS-2 TID:NE-OH-COL  
Alternate Route . . .......................................................  
Description . . . . .......................................................  
Display Alias in Destination Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
+ Alias Test Menu  
[Yes]  
No  
<F1> Help <F2> Send  
<F4> Close  
<Ctrl-R> Return to Main Menu  
Alias Edit Menu  
Alias Name . . . . . ............................................. PARENT1.2  
Destination . . . . .......................................... 172.16.30.61  
Caller's Address . . .......................................................  
Called Address . . . ................................................... PVC  
Call Data . . . . . .............................................. ASY.30.1  
Caller's Protocol . ................................................... =""  
Called Protocol . . ................................................... =""  
Application String . ....... TID:NE-OH-WORTHINGTON-1 TID:NE-OH-WORTHINGTON-2  
Alternate Route . . .......................................................  
Description . . . . .......................................................  
Display Alias in Destination Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
+ Alias Test Menu  
[Yes]  
No  
<F1> Help <F2> Send  
<F4> Close  
<Ctrl-R> Return to Main Menu  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting  
TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting  
If an OSS is not getting a response from an NE, it can send a TL1 retrieve header  
command (RTRV-HDR) to determine if the problem is with the NE or with AI232. The  
parent connection on AI232 responds to RTRV-HDRcommands that have the same TID  
as the one configured for the card.  
Tip: For more information regarding TL1 commands, responses, and formats, refer  
to the Belcore document GR-833-CORE.  
RTRV-HDR  
This command is used primarily as an aliveness check.  
Format  
RTRV-HDR:[ tid ]::ctag;  
Parameters  
tid  
Defines the TID for AI232. Note that the TID and SID are the same.  
ctag  
Defines the correlation tag used to correlate responses to input commands.  
Each input command has a unique ctag. Maximum length is 6 characters.  
Responses include the identical ctag.  
Normal Response Format  
This example displays the format of the response that appears when RTRV-HDRis  
successfully executed:  
<cr><lf><lf>  
<sp><sp><sp><SID><sp><YY-MM-DD><sp><HH:MM:SS><cr><lf>  
M<sp><sp><ctag><sp>COMPLD<cr><lf>;  
Table 6-1 describes each of the items in the above response format.  
Table 6-1 RTRV-HDR Response Format Description  
Response Item Description  
cr  
Specifies a carriage return.  
Specifies a line feed.  
lf  
sp  
SID  
Specifies a space.  
Specifies a system identifier (system ID).  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting  
Table 6-1 RTRV-HDR Response Format Description (Continued)  
Response Item Description  
YY-MM-DD  
HH:MM:SS  
ctag  
Specifies the date.  
Specifies the time of day.  
Specifies the correlation tag.  
COMPLD  
Specifies completion. The Input requirement is satisfied.  
Normal Response Example  
This example displays the response that appears when RTRV-HDR:AI232:12345;is  
executed.  
AI232 00-04-14 05:06:39  
M 12345 COMPLD;  
Error Response Format  
If AI232 receives TL1 commands other than RTRV-HDRwith the same card TID, it  
responds with a deny message. This example displays the deny message format.  
<cr><lf><lf>  
<sp><sp><sp><SID><sp><YY-MM-DD><sp><HH:MM:SS><cr><lf>  
M<sp><sp><ctag><sp>DENY<cr><lf>  
<sp><sp><sp><errcde><cr><lf>;  
Table 6-2 describes each of the items in the above response format.  
Table 6-2 Error Response Format Description  
Response Item Description  
cr  
Specifies a carriage return.  
Specifies a line feed.  
lf  
sp  
Specifies a space.  
SID  
Specifies a system identifier (system ID).  
Specifies the date.  
YY-MM-DD  
HH:MM:SS  
ctag  
Specifies the time of day.  
Specifies the correlation tag.  
Specifies that the input requirement is not satisfied.  
DENY  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting  
Table 6-2 Error Response Format Description (Continued)  
Response Item Description  
errcde Specifies the error code.  
Error Response Example  
This example displays the response that appears if RTRV-HDRfails.  
AI232 00-04-14 05:06:39  
M 12345 DENY  
IIAC;  
Diagnostics for TID Multiplexing  
To view information on TID multiplexed calls and the associated TIDs, use  
diag-tconn. This command displays a list of all connections on the card in the same  
format as diag-conn. However, diag-tconnis not interactive.  
Use this command either from the AI232 shell or through AI198 as a winslc  
command. Refer to diag-tconn on page 8-55 for more information.  
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
TID Multiplexing: TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting  
6-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Alias and Call Routing  
Configuration  
This chapter provides information on configuring aliases and routing calls on AI232.  
Guide to this Chapter  
Overview  
Call Routing  
Protocol Processing Modules  
Alias Macros  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Overview  
Overview  
AI232 uses aliases to route calls across the backplane of AIswitch. Each incoming  
call’s routing information must match an entry in the alias table, or else the call is  
rejected. When AI232 is in switch mode, the alias table is stored on AI198. When  
AI232 is in standalone mode, the alias table is stored in AI232’s local memory. For  
more information about alias translation and macros, see sections Call Routing on  
page 7-4 and Alias Macros on page 7-19.  
Figure 7-1 displays a typical call processing data flow scenario where AI232 is used.  
Data flow can be upstream or downstream, depending on the direction from which the  
data originates.  
AI232 Card A  
IP address  
172.16.30.100  
AI232 Card B  
IP address  
ASY  
172.16.30.200  
ASY  
Async  
TCP  
Incoming  
Asynchronous  
Call  
Outgoing  
TCP/IP  
Call  
TCP  
Async  
Incoming  
TCP/IP  
Call  
Outgoing  
Asynchronous  
call to asy.4.2  
Figure 7-1 Call Data Flow  
In Figure 7-1, an asynchronous protocol call is coming into AI232 card A and needs to  
pass over the IRB and be sent out AI232 card B. Refer to the figure to follow the flow  
of the call.  
The following events occur if the data flow is from left to right:  
1. The data comes into AI232 card A as an asynchronous packet.  
2. The data travels upstream and is converted into a TCP call.  
3. The data starts downstream through the ASY protocol option to preserve the  
packetization. Refer to ASY on page 7-18 for information about the ASY protocol.  
4. The data is sent out AI232 card A over TCP on the IRB.  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Overview  
5. The TCP packet is received by AI232 card B.  
6. The data travels upstream through the ASY protocol option to preserve  
packetization.  
7. The data packet is converted, travels downstream, and is transmitted out AI232  
using an asynchronous protocol with the original packetizing characteristics  
preserved.  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing  
Call Routing  
To route calls within AI232, an alias must be configured according to the source  
protocol and the destination protocol.  
ꢀ
Note: Aliases created in AI198 are not visible to AI232 when it is running in  
standalone mode. However, you can configure aliases in the AI232 local menu  
system when it is in standalone mode.  
Configuring an Alias  
To route calls with AI232, you must configure an alias for a source and destination  
protocol. The following procedure takes you through the configuration of an alias  
name on a single AI232 card and between two AI232 cards.  
ꢀ
Note: Specific configuration information about menu items in the following  
procedures is located in sections Source/Destination Protocol Tables for the  
AI198 Menu System on page 7-10 and Source/Destination Protocol Tables for  
the AI232 Menu System on page 7-12.  
Configuring an Alias in the AI198 Menu System  
To configure an alias in the AI198 Menu System:  
1. Log in to AI198.  
2. At the prompt, type menu. The main menu appears.  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing  
3. To access menu 08+Configure the alias translation table, enter 8. Menu 8 appears:  
>8  
Menu 8  
01 Alias name -****************************************************************  
02+Simple alias translation  
03 Destination -  
04 Called address -  
05 This alias is visible in the destination menu-----------------------------NO  
06 Link number is (1..16) -  
07 Caller's address -  
08 Call data -  
09 App. string -  
10 Called protocol -  
11 Caller's protocol -  
12 Alternate routing alias -  
14+Test macros  
15 Show entire alias  
16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table  
17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table  
18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table  
19+Delete the above alias translation entry  
20 Save the changes made (20b: to the beginning, 20e: to the end)  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
4. For 01 Alias name -, enter 1,followed by the alias name for the incoming (source)  
call.  
AI198 translates the alias name into a call of the type defined in the remaining  
alias menu items.  
ꢀ
Note: The alias name may include leading, trailing, or embedded wildcard  
matching characters. You may enter an asterisk (*) which replaces zero or  
more characters, a question mark (?) which replaces one character, or an  
alias macro that starts with an equal sign (=).  
For information on acceptable alias naming elements and conventions, refer to:  
z
z
z
z
Table 7-1 on page 7-10  
Table 7-2 on page 7-10  
Table 7-3 on page 7-11  
Table 7-4 on page 7-11.  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing  
5. To access menu 02+Simple alias translation, enter 2. Menu 8.2 appears:  
>2  
Menu 8.2  
01 Simple alias translation  
02 Multiplexed connection  
03 Multiplexed only translation  
04 SLC routing translation  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
6. To select 04 SLC routing translation, enter 4. Menu 8 reappears with the SLC  
routing translation configuration items.  
Important: Menu item 04 SLC routing translation is the only valid menu item for  
AI232. Use SLC routing translations to route calls through cards that  
support non-time division subchannel (TDS) connections.  
7. (optional) If you are routing calls between two AI232 cards, enter 3,and the IP  
address of the remote AI232.  
8. For 04 Called address -, enter 4,and the the called (destination) address.  
The called (destination) address defines the IP address to contact. Maximum  
length is 14 characters. The actual IP address or an alias macro can be entered  
here.  
9. For 05 This alias is visible in the destination menu, enter 5to toggle between Yes  
and No.  
This setting specifies if the alias will appear in the welcome screen.  
10. (optional) For 08 Call data -, enter 8,and the call user data.  
Call data is dependent on the type of SLC being used. It may be directly entered  
as an alias macro.  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing  
11. (optional) For 10 Called protocol -, enter 10,and the called protocol type.  
For more information about protocol types, refer to Protocol Processing Modules  
on page 7-14.  
12. (optional) For 11 Caller's protocol -, enter 11,and the caller’s protocol type.  
For more information about protocol types, refer to Protocol Processing Modules  
on page 7-14.  
13. For 20 Save the changes made, enter 20to save the alias configuration.  
14. Repeat this procedure for additional alias configurations.  
Configuring an Alias in the AI232 Menu System  
To configure an alias in the AI232 Menu System:  
1. Log in to AI232.  
2. At the prompt, type menu. The AI232 Main Menu appears.  
3. Access the Alias Menu. The Alias Summary Menu appears.  
4. From the the Alias Summary Menu, select [Add Alias]. The Alias Edit Menu  
appears:  
Alias Edit Menu  
Alias Name . . . . .  
Destination . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Address . . .......................................................  
Called Address . . . .......................................................  
Call Data . . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Protocol . .......................................................  
Called Protocol . . .......................................................  
Application String . .......................................................  
Alternate Route . . .......................................................  
Description . . . . .......................................................  
Display Alias in Destination Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
+ Alias Test Menu  
[Yes]  
No  
Range: {255 characters}  
<Ctrl-R> Return to Main Menu  
<F1> Help <F2> Send  
<F4> Close  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing  
5. For Alias Name, enter the alias name for the incoming (source) call.  
AI232 translates the alias name into a call of the type defined in the remaining  
alias menu items.  
ꢀ
Note: The alias name may include leading, trailing, or embedded wildcard  
matching characters. You may enter an asterisk (*) which replaces zero or  
more characters, a question mark (?) which replaces one character, or an  
alias macro that starts with an equal sign (=).  
For information on acceptable alias naming elements and conventions, refer to:  
z
z
z
z
Table 7-5 on page 7-12  
Table 7-6 on page 7-12  
Table 7-7 on page 7-12  
Table 7-8 on page 7-13.  
6. (optional) If you are routing calls between two AI232 cards, enter the IP address  
of the remote AI232 in the destination field.  
7. (optional) For Called Address, enter the called (destination) address.  
The called (destination) address defines the IP address to contact. Maximum  
length is 14 characters. The actual IP address or an alias macro can be entered  
here.  
8. (optional) For Call Data, enter the call user data.  
Call data is dependent on the type of SLC being used. It may be directly entered  
as an alias macro.  
9. (optional) For Caller's Protocol, enter the caller’s protocol type.  
For more information about protocol types, refer to Protocol Processing Modules  
on page 7-14.  
10. (optional) For Called Protocol, enter the called protocol type.  
For more information about protocol types, refer to Protocol Processing Modules  
on page 7-14.  
11. For Display Alias in Destination Menu, select Yes or No.  
This setting specifies if the alias will appear in the welcome screen.  
12. Select <F2> Send to save the changes.  
13. Repeat this procedure for additional alias configurations.  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing  
Source/Destination Protocol Tables  
The following tables are organized according to source protocols. Match the  
destination protocol with the source protocol to find the appropriate menu item  
entries:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Asynchronous Source Without Breaks (AI198) on page 7-10  
Asynchronous Source With Breaks (AI198) on page 7-10  
TCP/IP Source Without Telnet Breaks (AI198) on page 7-11  
TCP/IP Source With Telnet Breaks (AI198) on page 7-11  
Asynchronous Source Without Breaks (AI232) on page 7-12  
Asynchronous Source With Breaks (AI232) on page 7-12  
TCP/IP Source Without Telnet Breaks (AI232) on page 7-12  
TCP/IP Source With Telnet Breaks (AI232) on page 7-13.  
The following parameters are referenced in Table 7-1 on page 7-10 through Table 7-8  
on page 7-13:  
call_data  
Defines the call data. Maximum length is 16 characters.  
called_address  
Defines the address being called. Maximum length is 14  
characters.  
caller_address  
Defines the address of the caller. Maximum length is 14  
characters.  
ip_address  
Defines the IP address in dotted decimal format. The #symbol  
must be entered as a field separator between the ip_address  
field and the tcp_port_numberfield.  
link_number  
Defines the number of the serial link.  
tcp_port_number  
Defines the TCP port number. Valid values are from 1 to  
65535.  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing  
Source/Destination Protocol Tables for the AI198 Menu System  
Table 7-1 Asynchronous Source Without Breaks (AI198)  
Source Destination Menu Item  
Information  
baseport.asy.link_number  
Async  
Async  
01  
Example: 16.asy.3  
02  
04  
08  
SLC Routing Translation  
PVC  
asy.link_number  
Example: asy.3  
baseport.asy.link_number  
Async  
TCP  
01  
Example: 16.asy.3  
02  
04  
SLC Routing Translation  
Destination IP Address:  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
Example: 198.29.5.6#389  
Table 7-2 Asynchronous Source With Breaks (AI198)  
Source  
Destination Menu Item  
Information  
baseport.asy.link_number  
Async  
TCP with  
01  
telnet break  
Example: 16.asy.3  
02  
04  
SLC Routing Translation  
Destination IP Address:  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
Example: 198.29.5.6#389  
10  
11  
TN (refer to TN on page 7-17)  
=””  
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing  
Table 7-3 TCP/IP Source Without Telnet Breaks (AI198)  
Source Destination Menu Item  
Information  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
TCP  
TCP  
01  
Example: 198.29.5.6#389  
02  
04  
SLC Routing Translation  
Destination IP Address:  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
Example: 198.29.5.6#389  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
TCP  
Async  
01  
Example: 198.29.5.6#389  
02  
04  
08  
SLC Routing Translation  
PVC  
asy.link_number  
Example: asy.3  
Table 7-4 TCP/IP Source With Telnet Breaks (AI198)  
Source Destination  
Menu Item  
Information  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
TCP  
Async with  
01  
async break  
Example: 198.29.5.6#389  
02  
04  
08  
SLC Routing Translation  
PVC  
asy.link_number  
Example: asy.3  
11  
TN (refer to TN on page 7-17)  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing  
Source/Destination Protocol Tables for the AI232 Menu System  
Table 7-5 Asynchronous Source Without Breaks (AI232)  
Source Destination Menu Item  
Information  
Alias Name  
asy.link_number  
Async  
Async  
Example: asy.3  
Called Address  
Call Data  
PVC  
asy.link_number  
Example: asy.3  
Alias Name  
asy.link_number  
Async  
TCP  
Example: asy.3  
Called Address  
Destination IP Address:  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
Example: 198.29.5.6#389  
Table 7-6 Asynchronous Source With Breaks (AI232)  
Source  
Destination Menu Item  
Information  
Alias Name  
asy.link_number  
Async  
TCP with  
telnet break  
Example: asy.3  
Called Address  
Destination IP Address:  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
Example: 198.29.5.6#389  
Called Protocol  
TN (refer to TN on page 7-17)  
Caller’s Protocol  
=””  
Table 7-7 TCP/IP Source Without Telnet Breaks (AI232)  
Source Destination Menu Item  
Information  
Alias Name  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
TCP  
TCP  
Example: 198.29.5.6#389  
Called Address  
Destination IP Address:  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
Example: 198.29.5.6#389  
7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Call Routing  
Table 7-7 TCP/IP Source Without Telnet Breaks (AI232) (Continued)  
Source Destination Menu Item  
Information  
Alias Name  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
TCP  
Async  
Example: 198.29.5.6#389  
Called Address  
Call Data  
PVC  
asy.link_number  
Example: asy.3  
Table 7-8 TCP/IP Source With Telnet Breaks (AI232)  
Source Destination  
Menu Item  
Information  
Alias Name  
ip_address#tcp_port_number  
TCP  
Async with  
async break  
Example: 198.29.5.6#389  
Called Address  
Call Data  
PVC  
asy.link_number  
Example: asy.3  
Caller’s Protocol  
TN (refer to TN on page 7-17)  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Protocol Processing Modules  
Protocol Processing Modules  
Protocol processing modules are used to process data as it passes through AI232.  
Module Types  
The following module types are available:  
z
z
z
z
z
Packetizing module (PKT)  
Translation language one (TL1)  
Telnet module (TN)  
Asynchronous protocol processing module (ASY)  
Line discipline module (STT)  
PKT  
The packetizing module holds data as it arrives until AI232 receives specified  
characters (such as new lines). Once the packetizing character is received, all of the  
data that has been held is passed on as a single packet. This module also allows data  
to be packetized on a timer, which you can set. It also allows you to specify which  
characters, if any, to be filtered out of the data stream. PKT works on all protocols.  
Defaults  
Sets no packetizing timer  
Sets no idle packetizing timer  
Sets the packetizing timer to .06 seconds  
Sets no filter characters  
Passes the break upstream  
Passes the break downstream  
Discards unpacketized data when passing the break upstream  
Optional Parameters  
-Td  
Sets the packetizing timer to d hundredths of a second. It packetizes d  
hundredths of a second after the last time it was packetized. By setting d  
to zero, the option is turned off.  
-Id  
Sets the idle packetizing timer to dhundredths of a second. It packetizes  
after dhundredths of a second after not receiving any new characters.  
-Pd,d,d  
Sets the packetizing characters to the numbers entered in each doption.  
Specify up to 16 characters.  
7-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Protocol Processing Modules  
-Fd,d,d  
Sets the filter characters to the numbers entered in each doption.  
Specify up to 16 characters. It is possible to packetize on a filtered  
character.  
-U  
-D  
-S  
Prevents the passing of breaks upstream.  
Prevents the passing of breaks downstream.  
Packetizes on a specific sequence of characters. Enter up to 16  
characters. The packet module accepts only one -Sparameter.  
-E  
Activates local echo back to the original Telnet session.  
Examples  
PKT -T6  
Provides packetizing and sets the packetizing timer to .06  
seconds.  
PKT -P0xD,0x3B  
PKT -F10,127  
PKT -U  
Provides packetizing and sets the packetizing characters to  
carriage return and semi-colon.  
Provides packetizing and filters out the characters for line  
feed and delete.  
Provides packetizing but prevents breaks from being  
propagated upstream.  
PKT -I10 -P0x0D -D  
Provides packetizing on carriage returns for .10 seconds of  
idle time and prevents breaks from being propagated  
downstream.  
PKT -S13,10  
Provides packetizing and sets the sequence to carriage  
return followed by a line feed.  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Protocol Processing Modules  
TL1  
The Translation Language One module typically works with messages traveling  
between asynchronous protocols. However, it also works with all other protocols.  
Some OSSs require that each TL1 command/response be fully contained in one  
packet. By packetizing on the TL1 termination characters (“;<>”), the TL1 module  
ensures that each TL1 command/response is transmitted in one packet.  
Defaults  
Sets no packetizing timer  
Sets no idle packetizing timer  
Sets the packetizing timer to .06 seconds  
Sets no filter characters  
Passes the break upstream  
Passes the break downstream  
Discards unpacketized data when passing the break upstream  
Optional Parameters  
-Td  
Sets the packetizing timer to dhundredths of a second. It packetizes d  
hundredths of a second after the last time it was packetized. By setting d  
to zero, this option is turned off.  
-Id  
Sets the idle packetizing timer to dhundredths of a second. It packetizes  
after dhundredths of a second after not receiving any new characters.  
-Pd,d,d  
Sets the packetizing characters to the numbers entered in each doption.  
Specify up to 16 characters.  
-Fd,d,d  
Sets the filter characters to the numbers entered in each doption.  
Specify up to 16 characters. It is possible to packetize on a filtered  
character.  
-U  
Prevents the passing of breaks upstream.  
-D  
Prevents the passing of breaks downstream.  
-S  
Packetizes on a specific sequence of characters. Enter up to 16  
characters. The packet module accepts only one -Sparameter.  
-E  
Activates local echo back to the original Telnet session.  
7-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Protocol Processing Modules  
Examples  
TL1 -T6  
Provides TL1 packetizing and sets the packetizing timer to .06  
seconds.  
TL1 -F10,127  
TL1 -U  
Provides TL1 packetizing and filters out the characters for line  
feed and delete.  
Provides TL1 packetizing and prevents breaks from passing  
upstream.  
TL1 -120 -D  
Provides TL1 packetizing on TL1 delimiters for 20 seconds of idle  
time. Prevents breaks from passing downstream.  
TN  
The Telnet module filters Telnet commands out of the data stream and processes  
them appropriately. It also adds commands, as necessary, to data as it travels  
downstream. When a Telnet break is received, it is converted to an asynchronous  
break as required. When an asynchronous break is received from upstream, it is  
converted to a Telnet break and passed downstream.  
Defaults  
Passes breaks upstream  
Passes breaks downstream  
Initiates Telnet negotiation for WILL Echo and WILL SGA  
Optional Parameters  
-U  
Prevents passing break upstream.  
-D  
Prevents passing break downstream.  
-Ed,d  
Initiates Telnet negotiation for WILL Echo and WILL Suppress Go Ahead  
(SGA). This is useful when a Telnet connection is made to a remote device  
that provides an echo. If d,dis specified, then the Telnet negotiation string  
is modified. The Telnet negotiation string can be up to 32 characters.  
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Protocol Processing Modules  
Examples  
TN -U  
Provides Telnet handling, but prevents breaks from being  
propagated upstream.  
TN -E  
Provides Telnet handling and initiates Telnet negotiation for WILL  
Echo and WILL SGA.  
TN -E255,1  
Provides Telnet handling and causes the Telnet session to send IAC  
(255) ECHO (1) when the connection is initiated. Initiates WILL SGA.  
ASY  
The ASY module takes a single argument that specifies the string to be transmitted on  
the outgoing connection when a call is placed. The string typically contains a modem  
dial sequence.  
Optional Parameters  
Echo Causes local echo from an ASY port.  
Edit  
Buffers calls for line editing and sends lines as a whole when ENTER is  
pressed. Lines can be edited by using BACKSPACE.  
STT  
The STT module provides support for local echo and line edit capabilities.  
Optional Parameters  
Echo Echoes received characters back to the sender.  
Edit  
Echoes characters and provides buffering and line editing capabilities. With  
this option, received characters are forwarded one line at a time after  
receiving a terminating carriage return. Characters entered before the  
carriage return arrives can be deleted with the <Backspace> key.  
7-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Macros  
Alias Macros  
An alias macro is a program within an alias that translates incoming call requests into  
outgoing call requests. It is a shortcut that allows a programmer to write many aliases  
by only writing one macro.  
Macros allow for call routing with fewer aliases. Using them with alternate routing  
provides multiple routes for a single alias.  
A macro may be entered for combinations of any or all of the following items:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
Alias names  
Called addresses  
Caller’s addresses  
Call data  
Application-specific strings  
Alternate routing aliases.  
Each macro acts as a command line with instructions for matching patterns in alias  
fields and for manipulating them for redirection.  
The following topics are covered in this section:  
z
z
Alias Macro Components  
Alias Macro Configuration  
Alias Macro Components  
This section discusses the components in an alias macro, including:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Start Symbols  
Comments  
Constants  
Variables  
Wildcard Symbols  
Operators  
Functions  
Start Symbols  
The start symbol for an alias macro is an equal (=) sign. It is followed by one or more  
alias macro components.  
7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Macros  
Comments  
Comments are added at the programmer’s discretion to explain macro functionality.  
Comments can be entered either on a blank line or at the end of a line containing a  
macro. To enter a comment on a blank line, it must begin with two forward slashes (//).  
To enter a comment in a field with a macro, it must begin with a pound sign (#) at the  
end of a macro.  
This example displays a comment on its own line in the Application String field and a  
comment after a macro in the Alternate Route field.  
Application String . ........................................... //links 1-4  
Alternate Route . . ................................. ="6145550384"#from OH  
ꢀ
Note: The pound sign (#) can be entered as part of the macro string if it is enclosed  
in either single or double quotes. The pound sign may be either directly  
enclosed (=A+’#’+D(C)), or the string that the pound sign resides in may be  
enclosed (=‘198.127.1.4#23’).  
Constants  
Macro constants are either fixed alphanumeric characters enclosed in single or  
double quotes or integers between positive and negative 2,147,483,647. All constant  
strings equal zero. Constant strings cannot be used in mathematical functions.  
Variables  
Several variables are recognized by macros. Refer to Table 7-9 for more information.  
ꢀ
Note: Variables are not case-sensitive.  
Table 7-9 Macro Variables  
Variable  
Value  
C (CUD)  
Specifies a “call user data” variable.  
A (CALLED) Specifies a “called address” variable.  
B (CALLER) Specifies a “caller’s address” variable.  
7-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Macros  
Wildcard Symbols  
Macros have two available wildcard symbols:  
z ? matches any single character.  
z * matches zero or more characters.  
ꢀ
Note: Alias names that use wildcards are not really macros. Wildcards are not  
processed in alias names that start with ‘=’.  
Operators  
Operators are used for calculation of mathematical expressions in alias macros.  
AI232 evaluates expressions from left to right in order of precedence as shown in  
Table 7-10. To change the order of precedence, a programmer may enclose a portion  
of an expression in parentheses ( ) to calculate that portion first.  
4+3*2  
Specifies an equation that equals 10.  
(4+3)*2 Specifies an equation that equals 14.  
AI232 evaluates both regular and boolean logic operators. Refer to Table 7-10 for a  
list of all available operators in order of precedence.  
Table 7-10 Operators in Order of Precedence  
Operator Description  
#
Specifies a comment at the ends the alias macro expression.  
*
/
Specifies a multiplication operation.  
Specifies a division operation.  
%
Specifies the remainder of a division operation.  
+
-
Specifies an addition operation.  
Specifies a subtraction operation.  
Expressions that use the following operators return “0” for a false condition and “-1”  
for true condition:  
<<  
<<=  
=
Specifies a less than evaluation.  
Specifies a less than or equal to evaluation.  
Specifies an equal to evaluation.  
>
>=  
<<>  
Specifies a greater than evaluation.  
Specifies a greater than or equal to evaluation.  
Specifies a not equal to evaluation.  
7-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Macros  
Table 7-10 Operators in Order of Precedence (Continued)  
Operator Description  
&
^
Specifies a boolean logical AND evaluation. This requires that two  
conditions are true before continuing with the evaluation.  
Specifies a boolean logical exclusive OR evaluation. This requires that  
one condition or another (not both) is true before continuing with the  
evaluation.  
|
!
Specifies a boolean logical OR evaluation. This requires that one  
condition or both conditions are true before continuing with the  
evaluation.  
Specifies a boolean logical NOT evaluation. This changes a true  
condition to a false condition (and vice versa) before continuing with  
the evaluation.  
Functions  
Functions are preset command keywords that perform string and value conversions.  
Some functions can be entered with only a single character. For example, sand  
switchrepresent the same function.  
ꢀ
Note: Functions are not case-sensitive.  
Table 7-11 lists available functions and their descriptions in alphabetical order.  
Table 7-11 Alias Macro Functions  
Alias Macro Function  
Description of Operation  
asc(string)  
Returns the ASCII integer value of the first  
character in a string.  
chr$(n)  
Returns the character that corresponds to ASCII  
integer value n.  
hex$(n)  
or  
h(n)  
Returns the hexadecimal equivalent to decimal  
value n. For example, =hex$(31)returns hex value  
1F.  
if(expression,a,b)  
or  
Returns aif expressionis not zero or bif  
expressionis zero.  
i(expression,a,b)  
7-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Macros  
Table 7-11 Alias Macro Functions (Continued)  
Alias Macro Function  
Description of Operation  
left$(string,n)  
or  
Returns the left-most ncharacters of string. If nis  
greater than the length of string, the function  
returns the entire string.  
l(string,n)  
len(string)  
or  
n(string)  
Returns the length of string.  
mid$(string,x,n)  
or  
Returns ncharacters from stringstarting with the  
xth character. If xis greater than the length of  
string, the function returns a null string. If fewer  
than ncharacters follow character x, the function  
returns to end of the string.  
m(string,x,n)  
mid$(string,x)  
or  
Returns characters from stringstarting with the  
xth character and continuing to the right-most end  
character. If xis greater than the length of string,  
the function returns a null string.  
m(string,x)  
myip(n)  
Returns a string representation of the nth IP  
address assigned to AI232. nmust be greater than  
0.  
pos(string,char,n)  
or  
Returns the position of the nth occurrence of char  
in string. If there are less than noccurrences of  
char in string, the function returns the length of  
string.  
p(string,char,n)  
right$(string,n)  
Returns the right-most ncharacters of string.  
Returns the entire string if nis greater than the  
length of the string.  
or  
r(string,n)  
str$(n)  
Returns nconverted into a decimal string.  
or  
d(n)  
switch(target_exp,  
If target_expmatches exp1, the function returns  
default,exp1,result1,exp2 result1. If target_expmatches exp2, the function  
,result2...)  
returns result2. This continues through all pairs of  
expressions and results. If target_expdoes not  
match any of the expressions, then defaultis  
returned.  
or  
s(target_exp,default,exp1  
,result1,exp2,result2...)  
7-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Macros  
Table 7-11 Alias Macro Functions (Continued)  
Alias Macro Function  
Description of Operation  
val(string)  
or  
v(string)  
Converts a string to its decimal integer value. For  
example, =v(”032”)returns integer 32.  
?(n)  
Returns the nth wildcard string from the alias  
match.  
Alias Macro Configuration  
Often there are several ways to write a macro and get the same result. One  
programmer will likely design macros differently than another.  
ꢀ
Note: From the Alias Menu, you can input a string with * in it and the search will  
break apart the string using * as a delimiter. The search checks the alias list  
for an alias name that contains the components. It does not limit the search to  
the beginning and end of text of the alias as in AI198.  
Configuration Examples  
This example displays an alias where:  
z
Alias name 172.16.32.237#30* matches source address 172.16.32.237 with a  
port number of 30 followed by zero or more characters  
z
z
The caller’s address is PVC  
Call data ='ASY.'+D((V(?(1))%6)+1) creates strings from ASY.1 to ASY.6.  
Alias Edit Menu  
Alias Name . . . . . ..................................... 172.16.32.237#30*  
Destination . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Address . . ................................................... PVC  
Called Address . . . .......................................................  
Call Data . . . . . .............................. ='ASY.'+D((V(?(1))%6)+1)  
7-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Macros  
This example displays an alias where:  
z
Alias name 43042* matches source addresses that start with 43042 and may  
end with zero or more characters  
z
Called Address ='ASY.'+D((V(?(1))%6)+1) creates a called address string of  
ASY.1 through ASY.6.  
Alias Edit Menu  
Alias Name . . . . . ................................................ 43042*  
Destination . . . . .......................................................  
Caller's Address . . .......................................................  
Called Address . . . .............................. ='ASY.'+D((V(?(1))%6)+1)  
Call Data . . . . . ................................................. TOSUN  
This example displays an alias where:  
z
z
z
Alias name =L(A,P(A,’#’,1)-1)=MYIP(1) matches the base IP address of AI232  
with any port number  
Called address =’10.9.8.7#’+R(A,LEN(A)-P(A,’#’,1)) redirects the call to  
10.9.8.7 with the same port number  
Called protocol TN specifies that the Telnet protocol is used for the connection  
to the called address.  
Alias Edit Menu  
Alias Name . . . . . ............. =L(A,P(A,’#’,1)-1)=MYIP(1)  
Destination . . . . .......................................  
Caller's Address . . .......................................  
Called Address . . . ... =’10.9.8.7#’+R(A,LEN(A)-P(A,’#’,1))  
Call Data . . . . . .......................................  
Caller's Protocol ..........................................  
Called Protocol . ....................................... TN  
7-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Alias and Call Routing Configuration: Alias Macros  
7-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 8  
AI232 Commands  
This chapter provides information about each AI232 shell command and all AI198 winslc  
commands that are supported by AI232. These commands perform AI232 system tasks.  
Guide to this Chapter  
Commands Overview  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: Commands Overview  
Commands Overview  
AI232 is configurable directly through the local system using shell commands or  
through AI198 using winslc commands and the menu system.  
Shell Commands  
Shell commands offer some of the same functionality available in the AI232 local  
menu system, including:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Creating, modifying, or deleting users and passwords  
Accessing the AI232 menu  
Configuring PVCs  
Monitoring performance and diagnostic information  
Pinging an IP address  
Setting up an ARP table  
Setting the trace level.  
Shell Connections  
Before using the shell commands, a shell connection to AI232 must be established.  
You can connect locally using an asynchronous port on the AI232 front panel or  
remotely using a Telnet connection.  
Establishing a Local Shell Connection  
Establish a local shell connection to AI232 through any port configured as a login port.  
(By default, all ports are configured as login ports, but only port 1 is enabled.)  
1. Use a PC or laptop with terminal emulation software such as HyperTerminal to  
connect to AI232. For information on operating your particular terminal emulation  
software, refer to the documentation provided with the program.  
2. Set up your terminal emulation software to connect using COM port 1 (COM1).  
3. Configure COM port 1 with the following parameters:  
z
z
z
z
z
Bits per second: 9600  
Data bits: 8  
Parity: None  
Stop bits: 1  
Flow control: None  
4. From within your terminal emulation software, press ENTER to request a login  
prompt.  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: Commands Overview  
5. At the login prompt, enter your user name.  
6. At the password prompt, enter your password.  
ꢀ
Notes: aiis the default user name and password. AI232 allows only five logins  
using the default password. On the sixth login, AI232 will prompt you to  
change the default password to a new password.  
ꢀ Keep a copy of your username and password in a safe place. If you lose  
or forget your password on AI232 in standalone mode, you must call AI  
customer service for assistance in gaining access to the card.  
The destination menu appears.  
7. Enter ai.  
Establishing a Remote Shell Connection  
Establish a remote shell connection to AI232 using AI198 command telnetor using  
another Telnet client. To establish a Telnet session:  
1. Use a PC or laptop with terminal emulation software such as HyperTerminal to  
connect to AI232. For information on operating your particular terminal emulation  
software, refer to the documentation provided with the program.  
2. For user name, enter ai.  
3. For password, enter ai. The destination menu appears.  
4. For destination, enter ai. The [232] prompt appears.  
winslc Commands  
The winslc commands let the user communicate with AI232 from AI198. Use these  
commands to enter data, diagnose problems, and retrieve information from AI232.  
Displaying winslc Command Logging  
To monitor winslc commands, press CTRL+l when logged into AI198 to turn on  
logging.  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: Commands Overview  
Using winslc Commands  
To use winslc commands, the user must be logged into AI198 to receive output from  
AI232. AI198 relays the command to AI232, which processes the command and  
sends the result to the system log port (as configured in AI198 Menu 1.1). Valid winslc  
commands are:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
arp  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
pvclist  
break  
creset  
diag-tconn  
help  
router  
show  
staeia  
staslc  
ip  
tcpoutconn  
telnet  
link  
panic  
ping  
update  
xon-interval  
From the AI198, you can view the available winslc commands by entering the  
following command:  
winslc baseport help  
where baseportspecifies the baseport number of AI232.  
Log/Alarm Message Header  
To obtain output from winslc commands, enable the activity/alarm log (AI198 Menu  
1.1, menu item 01*The activity and alarm log is turned). The first line of the response  
for most winslc commands shows the following standard log/alarm message header:  
>@AI19807:42:26 081104 Sev=F Base=016 Msg:  
Table 8-1 describes the Log/Alarm message header elements.  
Table 8-1 Log/Alarm Message Header Elements  
Header Element Description  
@AI198  
Specifies the node name for the device that is producing the  
log/alarm message (in this case, AI198).  
7:42:26  
Specifies the current time.  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: Commands Overview  
Table 8-1 Log/Alarm Message Header Elements (Continued)  
Header Element Description  
081104  
Sev=F  
Specifies the current date.  
Specifies the message severity level.  
Specifies the line card baseport number.  
Introduces the log/alarm message.  
Base=016  
Msg  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: aaa account  
aaa account  
Description  
This command enables or disables TACACS+ accounting of user login events and  
shell command events. An accounting start packet or stop packet is issued each time  
a user logs into or out of AI232. An accounting start packet is also issued for each  
shell command that is run.  
ꢀ
Note: If enabled, accounting is performed for all shell connection types (Async,  
Telnet, and FTP), even if authentication is disabled. For information about  
authentication, refer to command aaa authen on page 8-7.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
aaa account { disable | enable }  
Parameters  
disable  
Disables TACACS+ accounting.  
enable  
Enables TACACS+ accounting.  
Command Defaults  
Disabled TACACS+ accounting  
Examples  
This example displays the enabling of TACACS+ accounting.  
[232]aaa account enable  
[232]  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: aaa authen  
aaa authen  
Description  
This command enables or disables TACACS+ authentication for AI232 command  
shell access. TACACS+ authentication may be enabled on all connections, or on a  
connection type basis. By default, TACACS+ authentication is disabled on all  
connection types.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
aaa authen { enable | disable } [ all | async | telnet | ftp ]  
Parameters  
enable  
Enables TACACS+ authentication.  
disable  
Disables TACACS+ authentication.  
all  
Enables or disables TACACS+ authentication on all connection types.  
ꢀ
Note: If no connection type is specified, allis automatically selected.  
async  
Enables or disables TACACS+ authentication on asynchronous link  
connections.  
telnet  
Enables or disables TACACS+ authentication on Telnet connections.  
ftp  
Enables or disables TACACS+ authentication on FTP connections.  
Examples  
This example displays the enabling of TACACS+ authentication on all connection  
types.  
[232]aaa authen enable  
[232]  
This example displays the disabling of TACACS+ authentication on asynchronous link  
connections.  
[232]aaa authen disable async  
[232]  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: aaa author  
aaa author  
Description  
This command configures the TACACS+ authorization method for the AI232 shell.  
The authorization method can be either privilege level or per-command. Privilege  
level authorization is based on the priv-lvl returned from the TACACS+ server.  
Per-command authorization requires AI232 to contact the TACACS+ server for each  
shell command run by a user. Individual commands are then allowed or denied.  
ꢀ
Note: Authorization is performed only on the connection types that have enabled  
authentication. For information about enabling authentication, refer to  
command aaa authen on page 8-7.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
aaa author { priv-lvl | command }  
Parameters  
priv-lvl  
Configures the TACACS+ authorization method based on the priv-lvl  
returned from the TACACS+ server.  
command  
Configures the TACACS+ authorization method that requires AI232 to  
contact the TACACS+ server for each shell command run by a user.  
Individual commands are then allowed or denied.  
Command Defaults  
priv-lvl  
Examples  
This example displays the configuration of per-command TACACS+ authorization.  
[232]aaa author command  
[232]  
8-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: aaa chpass  
aaa chpass  
Description  
This command changes the current user’s password on the TACACS+ server.  
ꢀ
Note: The TACACS+ server may not support, or be configured to support, password  
changes.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
aaa chpass  
Examples  
This example displays a successful password change on a TACACS+ server.  
[232] aaa chpass  
Old Password:  
New Password:  
Re-enter New password:  
Password Changed  
Password Change was successful  
[232]  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: aaa fallback  
aaa fallback  
Description  
This command enables or disables TACACS+ fallback for shell access. If TACACS+  
fallback is enabled and attempts to contact all configured TACACS+ servers fail, then  
AI232’s user database is used for authentication and authorization. The AI232 local  
log file is used for accounting.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
aaa fallback { disable | enable }  
Parameters  
disable  
Disables TACACS+ fallback.  
enable  
Enables TACACS+ fallback.  
Command Defaults  
Enabled TACACS+ fallback  
Examples  
This example displays the disabling of TACACS+ fallback.  
[232]aaa fallback disable  
[232]  
8-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: aaa ppp authen  
aaa ppp authen  
Description  
This command enables or disables TACACS+ authentication and sets the fallback  
mode for specified AsyncPPP links.  
ꢀ
Note: The link type must be set to AsyncPPP for this command to have any effect.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
aaa ppp authen { link_range | * } { disable | enable | fallback }  
Parameters  
link_range  
Defines a link or range of links. Valid values are 1 to 32. Individual  
values are separated by commas (,) and hyphens (-). For example,  
1,4-6 specifies links 1, 4, 5, and 6.  
*
Specifies all links.  
disable  
Disables TACACS+ authentication.  
enable  
Enables TACACS+ authentication with no fallback.  
fallback  
Enables TACACS+ authentication with fallback.  
Command Defaults  
Disabled (all links)  
Examples  
This example displays the enabling of TACACS+ authentication for link range  
19,23-29.  
[232]aaa ppp authen 19,23-29 enable  
[232]  
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: aaa profile  
aaa profile  
Description  
This command associates a custom profile with a privilege level or range of privilege  
levels. The following rules apply:  
z
z
z
z
TACACS+ privilege levels range from 0 to 15.  
Custom profiles can be associated with privilege levels 2 through 14.  
Privilege levels 2 through 14 default to the management system profile.  
Privilege levels 0, 1, and 15 are reserved for the Status, Management, and  
Supervisor system profiles (respectively).  
For information on creating custom profiles, refer to command profile on page 8-78.  
Privilege levels are used only if the authorization method is set to priv-lvl. The only  
exception to this occurs under all of the following conditions:  
1. The authentication server returns a privilege level.  
2. The authorization server cannot be reached.  
3. The authorization is set to per-command and fallback is enabled.  
For information on configuring the authorization method, refer to command aaa  
author on page 8-8.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
aaa profile { priv_range } { profile_name | default }  
Parameters  
priv_range  
Defines the range of privilege levels that will be associated with  
the profile. Individual values are separated by commas (,) and  
hyphens (-). For example, 1,4-6 specifies privilege levels 1, 4, 5,  
and 6.  
profile_name  
Specifies the name of an existing profile.  
default  
Removes the association between a range of privilege levels and  
a profile.  
Command Defaults  
No associations configured  
8-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: aaa profile  
Examples  
This example associates privilege level 2 with profile newprof1:  
[232] aaa profile 2 newprof1  
[232]  
This example associates privilege levels 3 to 6 and 14 with profile newprof2:  
[232] aaa profile 3-6,14 newprof2  
[232]  
8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: aaa retry  
aaa retry  
Description  
This command configures the number of consecutive connection attempts that are  
made to a TACACS+ server before the attempt fails.  
ꢀ
Note: Consecutive attempts are only made if the TACACS+ server responds but  
refuses a connection. If no response is received from a TACACS+ server  
before the configured timeout period, then no further connection attempts are  
made. For information on configuring the timeout period, refer to command  
aaa timeout on page 8-19  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
aaa retry { retry_count | default }  
Parameters  
retry_count  
Defines the number of consecutive connection attempts that are  
made. Valid values are 1 to 100.  
default  
Resets the number of connection attempts to the default value.  
Command Defaults  
1 connection attempt  
Examples  
This example displays the configuration of consecutive connection attempts to 5.  
[232] aaa retry 5  
[232]  
8-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: aaa stats  
aaa stats  
Description  
This command displays or clears AAA specific counters and statistics.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
aaa stat [ clear ]  
Parameters  
clear  
Clears all counters and statistics.  
Examples  
This example displays all AAA specific counters and statistics.  
AAA Statistics  
--------------  
Authentication Attempts: 0  
Authentication Failures: 0  
Authentication Fallbacks: 0  
Authorization Attempts: 0  
Authorization Failures: 0  
Authorization Fallbacks: 0  
Accounting Attempts: 0  
Accounting Failures: 0  
Accounting Fallbacks: 0  
[232]  
Display Item  
Description  
Authentication Attempts  
Displays the number of TACACS+ authentication  
attempts.  
Authentication Failures  
Authentication Fallbacks  
Displays the number of failed TACACS+ authentication  
attempts.  
Displays the number of TACACS+ authentication  
fallbacks, where AI232’s user database was used for  
authentication instead of the TACACS+ server.  
8-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: aaa stats  
Display Item  
Description  
Authorization Attempts  
Displays the number of TACACS+ authorization  
attempts.  
Authorization Failures  
Authorization Fallbacks  
Displays the number of failed TACACS+ authorization  
attempts.  
Displays the number of TACACS+ authorization  
fallbacks, where AI232’s user database was used for  
authorization instead of the TACACS+ server.  
Accounting Attempts  
Accounting Failures  
Displays the number of TACACS+ accounting attempts.  
Displays the number of failed TACACS+ accounting  
attempts.  
Accounting Fallbacks  
Displays the number of TACACS+ accounting fallbacks,  
where AI232’s system log was used for accounting  
instead of the TACACS+ server.  
8-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: aaa summary  
aaa summary  
Description  
This command displays a summary of all authentication, authorization, and  
accounting settings.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
aaa summary  
Examples  
This example displays a summary of all authentication, authorization, and accounting  
settings.  
[232] aaa summary  
Async Shell Access:  
Telnet Shell Access:  
FTP Access:  
Local  
Local  
Local  
Authorization:  
Accounting:  
Fallback:  
Priv-lvl  
Disabled  
Disabled  
15 seconds  
5
AAA Timeout:  
AAA Retry Count:  
Priv-lvl 2: newprof1  
Priv-lvl 3: newprof2  
Priv-lvl 4: newprof2  
Priv-lvl 5: newprof2  
Priv-lvl 6: newprof2  
Priv-lvl 14: newprof2  
[232]  
Display Item  
Description  
Async Shell Access  
Displays the status of asynchronous shell access as AAA  
(TACACS+ authentication enabled) or local (TACACS+  
authentication disabled).  
Telnet Shell Access  
Displays the status of Telnet shell access as AAA (TACACS+  
authentication enabled) or local (TACACS+ authentication  
disabled).  
8-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: aaa summary  
Display Item  
Description  
FTP Access  
Displays the status of FTP access as AAA (TACACS+  
authentication enabled) or local (TACACS+ authentication  
disabled).  
Authorization  
Displays the TACACS+ authorization method for the AI232  
shell as Priv-lvl (based on the user’s privilege level) or  
Per-command (based on per-command request/reply handling).  
Accounting  
Fallback  
Displays the TACACS+ accounting status of user login events  
and shell command events as Enabled or Disabled.  
Displays the status of TACACS+ fallback as Enabled or  
Disabled.  
AAA Timeout  
Displays the number of seconds AI232 will wait for a  
response from a TACACS+ server. If no response is received  
from the server in the allowed number of seconds, the  
connection attempt fails.  
AAA Retry Count  
Displays the number of consecutive connection attempts that  
are made to a TACACS+ server before the attempt fails.  
Priv-lvl settings  
Displays the configured privilege levels with their associated  
profiles.  
8-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: aaa timeout  
aaa timeout  
Description  
This command configures the number of seconds to wait for a response from a  
TACACS+ server. If no response is received from the server in the allowed number of  
seconds, the connection attempt fails.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
aaa timeout { timeout_value | default }  
Parameters  
timeout_value  
Defines how long (in seconds) AI232 will wait for a response from  
a TACACS+ server when a connection attempt is made. Valid  
values are 1 to 120.  
default  
Resets the timeout value to its default.  
Command Defaults  
15 seconds  
Examples  
This example displays the configuration of the TACACS+ timeout value to 93seconds.  
[232]aaa timeout 93  
[232]  
8-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: alarm  
alarm  
Description  
This command:  
z
z
Displays a list of the alarm groups and the overall alarm severity  
Displays alarms for a specified alarm group or for a specified range of severity  
levels within an alarm group  
z
z
z
z
z
Displays alarms by severity level or for a specified range of severity levels  
Clears all non-self-clearing alarm groups and the overall alarm severity  
Clears a specified non-self-clearing alarm group  
Masks a specified alarm group  
Unmasks a specified alarm group.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
alarm [ group [ range ] ]  
alarm -sev [ range ]  
alarm { -clear [ group ] | -mask group | -unmask group }  
Parameters  
group  
Defines the group of alarms to display, clear, mask, or unmask. Valid  
values are existing alarm groups.  
range  
Defines a range of alarm severity levels to display. Valid values are 1 to  
32. Individual values in the range are separated by hyphens (-).  
-sev  
Displays all alarms or a range of alarms based severity level.  
-clear  
Clears all non-self-clearing alarm groups or a specified non-self-clearing  
alarm group.  
ꢀ
Note: Only non-self-clearing alarm groups can be manually cleared.  
Self-clearing alarms clear themselves when the problem that  
caused the alarm is resolved.  
-mask  
Prevents a specified alarm group from affecting overall alarm severity.  
-unmask  
Allows a specified alarm group to affect overall alarm severity.  
8-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: alarm  
Examples  
This example displays a list of the alarm groups and the overall alarm severity.  
[232] alarm  
Alarm Group Sev Date & Time Message (most recent, most severe in group)  
----------- --- ----------- ----------------------------------------------  
*general  
links  
0 00-00 00:00  
0 06-05 21:19 Link 3 up.  
----------- --- ----------- ----------------------------------------------  
*not self-clearing () masked  
Overall alarm severity: 0  
[232]  
This example displays all system alarms in group links.  
[232] alarm links  
Num Sev Date & Time Message  
--- --- ----------- ------------------------------------------  
1 0 00-00 00:00  
2 0 00-00 00:00  
3 0 00-00 00:00  
4 0 00-00 00:00  
5 0 00-00 00:00  
6 0 00-00 00:00  
7 0 00-00 00:00  
8 0 00-00 00:00  
9 0 00-00 00:00  
10 0 00-00 00:00  
11 0 00-00 00:00  
12 0 00-00 00:00  
13 0 01-26 15:34 Link 13 up.  
14 0 01-26 15:34 Link 14 up.  
15 0 00-00 00:00  
16 0 00-00 00:00  
17 0 00-00 00:00  
18 0 00-00 00:00  
19 0 00-00 00:00  
20 0 00-00 00:00  
21 0 00-00 00:00  
22 0 00-00 00:00  
23 0 00-00 00:00  
24 0 00-00 00:00  
25 0 00-00 00:00  
26 0 00-00 00:00  
27 0 00-00 00:00  
28 0 00-00 00:00  
29 0 00-00 00:00  
30 0 00-00 00:00  
31 0 00-00 00:00  
32 0 00-00 00:00  
--- --- ----------- ----------------------------------------------  
'links' alarm group severity: 0  
[232]  
8-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: alarm  
This example displays alarms for links 5-8 in group links.  
[232]alarm links 5-8  
Num Sev Date & Time Message  
--- --- ----------- ------------------------------------------  
5 4 06-13 14:40 Link 5 is enabled but has not come up.  
6 0 06-13 14:40 Link 6 up.  
7 0 06-13 14:40 Link 7 up.  
8 0 06-13 14:40 Link 8 up.  
--- --- ----------- ------------------------------------------  
'links' alarm group severity: 4  
[232]  
This example displays all alarms by severity level.  
[232]alarm -sev  
Alarm Group Num Sev Date & Time Message  
----------- --- --- ----------- ----------------------------------------------  
links  
links  
links  
links  
general  
1 4 06-13 14:40 Link 1 is enabled but has not come up.  
5 4 06-13 14:40 Link 5 is enabled but has not come up.  
10 4 06-13 14:40 Link 10 is enabled but has not come up.  
12 4 06-13 14:40 Link 12 is enabled but has not come up.  
1 6 06-13 14:40 Unable to find auto ID name of 222 board  
----------- --- --- ----------- ----------------------------------------------  
( ) masked  
[232]  
This example displays all alarms that have a severity level between 4 and 7.  
[232]alarm -sev 4-7  
Alarm Group Num Sev Date & Time Message  
----------- --- --- ----------- ----------------------------------------------  
links  
links  
links  
links  
general  
1 4 06-13 14:40 Link 1 is enabled but has not come up.  
5 4 06-13 14:40 Link 5 is enabled but has not come up.  
10 4 06-13 14:40 Link 10 is enabled but has not come up.  
12 4 06-13 14:40 Link 12 is enabled but has not come up.  
1 6 06-13 14:40 Unable to find auto ID name of 222 board  
----------- --- --- ----------- ----------------------------------------------  
( ) masked  
[232]  
This example displays the clearing of all non-self-clearing alarm groups.  
[232] alarm -clear  
Alarm groups cleared.  
Overall alarm severity set to 0.  
[232]  
This example displays the clearing of non-self-clearing alarm group general.  
[232] alarm -clear general  
Alarm group cleared.  
[232]  
8-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: alarm  
This example displays the prevention of alarm group links from affecting the overall  
alarm severity.  
[232]alarm -mask links  
Alarm group masked.  
[232]alarm  
This example displays the unmasking of alarm group links.  
[232]alarm -unmask links  
Alarm group unmasked.  
[232]  
8-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: arp  
arp  
Description  
This command displays, deletes, or adds entries in the ARP cache.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell:  
arp -a [ ip_address ]  
arp -d ip_address  
arp -s ip_address mac_address  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport arp -a [ ip_address ]  
winslc baseport arp -d ip_address  
winslc baseport arp -s ip_address mac_address  
Parameters  
-a  
Displays all entries in the ARP cache table or just the ip_address  
entry.  
ip_address  
Defines the IP address of the destination device in dotted decimal  
format.  
-d  
Deletes an entry from the ARP cache table.  
-s  
Adds a permanent entry to the ARP cache for the current session.  
Permanent entries must be in the same subnetwork as the IP  
address of the destination device.  
mac_address  
Defines the MAC address of the destination device.  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI232.  
8-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: arp  
Examples  
This example displays all ARP cache entries.  
[232] arp -a  
Internet Address  
172.16.52.16  
172.16.2.9  
[232]  
Ethernet Address  
00-00-92-90-F2-D9  
00-40-72-00-7F-96  
Type  
temp  
temp  
Life  
5 mins  
2 mins  
Column  
Description  
Internet Address  
Ethernet Address  
Type  
Displays the IP address of the destination device.  
Displays the MAC address of the destination device.  
Displays the type of ARP cache entry as perm or temp. Type temp  
specifies that the entry is temporary and will be deleted when the  
time interval specified in the Life column expires. Type perm  
specifies that the entry was entered by the user with the -s  
option. This entry will not expire and can be removed using the  
-ddelete option.  
ꢀ
Note: Resetting AI232 clears both permanent and temporary  
entries.  
Life  
Displays the time interval for which the temporary entry will  
remain in the ARP cache.  
This example displays an ARP cache entry with IP address 172.16.31.100.  
[232] arp -a 172.16.31.100  
Internet Address  
172.16.31.100  
[232]  
Ethernet Address  
08-00-09-7B-88-0C  
Type  
temp  
Life  
5 mins  
This example displays the configuration of an ARP cache entry with IP address  
172.16.31.106 and MAC address 08-00-09-4a-c5-5a.  
[232] arp -s 172.16.31.106 08-00-09-4a-c5-5a  
172.16.31.106 mapped to Ethernet address 08-00-09-4A-C5-5A  
[232]  
8-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: arp  
This example displays the deletion of an ARP cache entry with IP address  
172.16.30.117.  
[232] arp -d 172.16.30.117  
Mapping for 172.16.30.117 deleted  
[232]  
8-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: break  
break  
Description  
This command terminates an asynchronous or shell connection. Use command diag-  
tconn on page 8-55 (not command who on page 8-123) when referencing  
connections and connection ID numbers.  
ꢀ
Note: This command only works for calls connected to the shell.  
CAUTION: This command operates without regard to current activity on the serial  
port.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
break { link_number | connection_origin }  
break -id id_number  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport break { link_number | connection_origin }  
winslc baseport break -id id_number  
Parameters  
link_number  
Defines the link number for the connection being terminated.  
connection_origin  
Defines the IP address and port number of the device  
connection being terminated.  
id_number  
Defines the ID number of the device connection being  
terminated.  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI232.  
8-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: break  
Examples  
This example displays the termination of a shell connection for a device with IP  
address 10.40.5.11 and port number 1821.  
[232]break 10.40.5.11#1821  
Breaking connection: 10.40.5.11#1821  
[232]  
This example displays the termination of a connection for a device with ID 65.  
[232]break -id 65  
Breaking connection with ID: 65  
[232]  
8-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: creset  
creset  
Description  
This command resets the error counters for a link or a range of links. There is no  
output for this command. To see if the error counters were reset for the links you  
specified, enter command staslc on page 8-92.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
creset range  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport creset range  
Parameters  
range  
Defines the link or a range of links being reset. Valid values are:  
z
z
z
z
A single link number (for example, 3to reset error counters for link  
3)  
A series of link numbers separated by commas (for example, 1,2,3  
to reset error counters for links 1, 2, and 3)  
A range of link numbers separated by a dash (for example, 1-2to  
reset error counters for links 1 and 2)  
Any combination of a single link number, series, and/or range (for  
example, 1,2-3to reset error counters for links 1, 2, and 3)  
z * to reset error counters for all links.  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI232.  
Examples  
This example displays the resetting of error counters for links 5 to 7.  
[232]creset 5-7  
[232]  
8-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: date  
date  
Description  
This command sets and displays the date and the time for AI232 when it is operating  
in standalone mode.  
Command Types  
shell  
Formats  
date  
Examples  
This example displays the configuration of date 08-04-2005and time 10:24:49for AI232  
in standalone mode.  
[232]date  
Today is Thursday 05-01-2004 01:09:52  
Please enter the date and/or time.  
Use 'MM-DD-YYYY' and/or 'hh:mm:ss' (24-hour format): 08-04-2005 10:24:49  
[232]  
8-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: debug  
debug  
Description  
This command enables or disables the logging of debugging data.  
Tip: You have to have logging turned on to view debug information from a shell  
connection.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
debug { alias | x25 | pvcfsm | asypvcfsm | nlipvcfsm | tpifsm |  
modmuxfsm | allfsm | pppfsm | linkChange | bootp | all } { on | off }  
Parameters  
alias  
Enables or disables the logging of alias translation debugging data.  
x25  
Used primarily by AI Technical Support to isolate system faults.  
pvcfsm  
Used primarily by AI Technical Support to isolate system faults.  
asypvcfsm  
Used primarily by AI Technical Support to isolate system faults.  
nlipvcfsm  
Used primarily by AI Technical Support to isolate system faults.  
tpifsm  
Used primarily by AI Technical Support to isolate system faults.  
modmuxfsm  
Used primarily by AI Technical Support to isolate system faults.  
allfsm  
Used primarily by AI Technical Support to isolate system faults.  
pppfsm  
Used primarily by AI Technical Support to isolate system faults.  
bootp  
Enables or disables the logging of bootp attempts so that users can  
determine if the bootp process is still underway or if it has been  
completed.  
linkChange  
Enables or disables the logging of debugging data when the PPP  
protocol on a link has gone down.  
all  
Enables or disables the logging of all debugging data.  
on  
Enables the logging of specified debugging data.  
off  
Disables the logging of specified debugging data.  
8-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: debug  
Examples  
This example displays the enabling of all debug data logging.  
[232]debug all on  
debug alias is on  
debug pvcfsm is on  
debug asypvcfsm is on  
debug nlipvcfsm is on  
debug tpifsm is on  
debug modmuxfsm is on  
debug allfsm is on  
debug pppfsm is on  
debug linkChange is on  
debug bootp is on  
[232]  
8-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: delete  
delete  
Description  
This command deletes a specified file that resides on AI232.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
delete filename  
Parameters  
filename  
Defines the name of the file to delete.  
Examples  
This example displays the deletion of file log.txt.  
[232]delete log.txt  
Are you sure you want to delete 'log.txt'? (y/n) y  
log.txt deleted.  
[232]  
8-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: diag-conn  
diag-conn  
Description  
This command displays a list of enabled links along with connection information for  
each link. Data can be displayed continuously, one page at a time, or sent to the  
screen one time only for all connections. The default mode is a continuous display.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
diag-conn  
Examples  
This example displays existing connections across AI232.  
C O N N E C T I O N S Mode: Continuous [Search Inactive]  
103. ASY.1.1  
113. TCP 172.16.2.9#1032  
[ Idle  
<--Data Transfer-->  
]
SHELL  
Enter S-kip, I-nternal, A-ll, M-ore, D-etail, F-ind, P-revPg, N-extPg or Q-uit:  
ꢀ
Note: For explanations of the states shown, such as idle and data transfer, refer to  
section pvclist on page 8-80.  
Display Item Description  
S-kip  
This option bypasses connections. It gives a prompt for the number  
of connections to skip.  
I-nternal  
This option toggles between I-nternal and H-ide Int. I-nternal  
displays all the internal loopback connections along with other  
connections.  
A-ll  
This option displays all connections without page breaks. The  
display does not show duplicate connections. For example, if  
connection number 15 is connected to 30, the connection from 30  
to 15 will not appear.  
M-ore  
This option toggles between M-oreand L-ess. It displays the link and  
PVC number for X.25 PVCs, the link and X.121 addresses for X.25  
SVCs, and the alias used to make the connection.  
8-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: diag-conn  
Display Item Description  
D-etail  
This option prompts for the ID of the connection to view and  
displays details for that connection.  
F-ind  
This option displays specific types of connections. F-ind indicates  
text matches that are applied to the display lines. The matching is  
not case-sensitive. The logic for the matches can be AND or OR.  
PATTERN 1, LOGIC 2, and PATTERN 3 are evaluated before  
LOGIC 4 and PATTERN 5 are considered.  
P-revPg  
This option displays the previous page of connections. Twenty  
connections per page appear. The numbers that appear in front of  
the description (for example, 103. and 113.) are relative numbers  
and do not represent any particular link, port, or PVC. The display  
does not show duplicate connections. For example, if connection  
number 15 is connected to 30, the connection from 30 to 15 will not  
appear.  
N-extPg  
This option displays the next page of connections. Twenty  
connections per page appear. The numbers that appear in front of  
the description (for example, 103. and 113.) are relative numbers  
and do not represent any particular link, port, or PVC. The display  
does not show duplicate connections. For example, if connection  
15 is connected to 30, the connection from 30 to 15 will not appear.  
Q-uit  
This option exits the command display and returns the user to the  
prompt.  
8-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: diag-eth  
diag-eth  
Description  
This command monitors and displays Ethernet diagnostic information.  
Using Interpretation Mode  
There are three levels of diagnostic information:  
z
z
z
Minimum—Displays minimal diagnostic information (mostly the packet’s source  
and destination). This is the default interpretation mode setting.  
Medium—Displays protocol fields that are likely to change for each packet, as  
well as those with values that are out of the ordinary.  
Maximum—Displays all protocol fields.  
To configure interpretation mode:  
1. At the prompt, enter diag-eth.  
2. Enter interpret minimum, interpret medium, interpret maximum, or  
interpret.  
Tip: Entering interpretwith no additional parameter toggles interpretation off  
and on. When interpretation is toggled from off to on, the diagnostic level is  
set to the minimum level (the default).  
Using the Timestamp Option  
Timestamps can be configured to appear on the diagnostic display. The time that  
appears is the number of days, hours, minutes, seconds, and thousandths of a  
second since AI232 was last reset.  
To enable or disable timestamp display:  
1. At the prompt, enter diag-eth.  
2. Enter timestampto toggle between enabling and disabling the display of the  
timestamp.  
Using Promiscuous Mode  
Promiscuous mode can be enabled or disabled during Ethernet diagnostic sessions.  
By disabling promiscuous mode, only packets traveling on the network that are  
destined for your Ethernet card appear. By enabling promiscuous mode, all the  
packets traveling on the network appear.  
To enable and disable promiscuous mode:  
1. At the prompt, enter diag-eth.  
8-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: diag-eth  
2. Enter promiscuousto toggle between enabling and disabling promiscuous mode.  
ꢀ
Note: Operating AI232 in the promiscuous mode can reduce performance. The  
default setting is disabled promiscuous mode. AI232 automatically returns  
to the default setting (promiscuous mode disabled) when the user quits  
the diag-ethcommand.  
Using the Help Option  
To obtain command help:  
1. At the prompt, enter diag-eth.  
2. Enter help. The diag-ethhelp screen appears.  
Configuring Filters  
While using the diag-ethcommand, various filters can be defined to display specific  
or general diagnostic information.  
Tip: There is help associated with the filtercommand. To view this help, enter  
filterafter you enter diag-eth. The filterhelp screen appears.  
Important: If you are connecting to AI232 using Telnet, remember to filter out the  
traffic associated with the telnet connection. Failure to do so can cause  
the diagnostic program to become overloaded, which makes AI232  
unresponsive.  
To configure a filter:  
1. At the prompt, enter diag-eth.  
2. Enter the desired filter. Refer to section Formats on page 8-38 for information on  
filter formats.  
Capturing Data  
While using the diag-ethcommand, data can be captured for Ethernet diagnostics.  
All variables and filters can be configured for specific or general information capture.  
To configure data capture:  
1. Define the following settings:  
z
z
z
z
z
Interpretation Mode  
Timestamp Mode  
Promiscuous Mode  
Data Mode  
Filters  
8-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: diag-eth  
2. Enter go. The system starts capturing data with the user-defined settings and  
filters.  
3. Enter stopto stop capturing data.  
Exiting the diag-eth Session  
To exit the diag-ethsession, type quit. The [232] prompt appears.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
diag-eth  
The following formats apply to filters:  
filter { add | delete } [ src mac_address ] [ dst mac_address ]  
filter { add | delete } [ src ip_address ] [ dst ip_address ]  
filter { add | delete } [ src ip_address#port_number ]  
[ dst ip_address#port_number ]  
filter { add | delete } [ src *#port_number ] [ dst *#port_number ]  
filter { add | delete } protocol [ ip | tcp | udp | icmp | arp | osi ]  
filter { add | delete } all  
filter list  
Parameters  
add  
Adds a filter.  
delete  
Deletes a filter.  
src  
Defines the source address (MAC, IP, or TCP/UDP)  
for the filter being created.  
mac_address  
Defines the MAC address to use for either the source  
or destination of the filter being created.  
dst  
Defines the destination address (MAC, IP, or  
TCP/UDP) for the filter being created.  
ip_address  
Defines the IP address to use for either the source or  
destination of the filter being created.  
ip_address#port_number  
Defines the IP address and the TCP/UDP port number  
for either the source or destination of the filter being  
created.  
8-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: diag-eth  
*#port_number  
protocol  
Defines the TCP/UDP port number regardless of the  
MAC/IP address settings.  
Adds or deletes a specific protocol filter. Available  
protocol filters are:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
ip  
tcp  
udp  
icmp  
arp  
osi.  
all  
Deletes all the filters or adds a filter to show all  
Ethernet traffic.  
list  
Lists all the filters in the system.  
Examples  
This example displays the configuration of diagnostic interpretation level mediumfor the  
Ethernet diagnostic session display.  
[232]diag-eth  
interpret medium  
Interpretation is now set to MEDIUM.  
This example displays the enabling and disabling of the timestamp display.  
[232]diag-eth  
timestamp  
Timestamps will now be displayed.  
timestamp  
Timestamps will no longer be displayed.  
This example displays the enabling and disabling of promiscuous mode.  
[232]diag-eth  
promiscuous  
The ethernet chip is now in promiscuous mode.  
promiscuous  
The ethernet chip is now in normal mode.  
8-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: diag-eth  
This example displays Ethernet diagnostic help information.  
[232]diag-eth  
help  
Commands for diag-eth:  
interpret  
quit  
help  
Turn on data interpretation.  
Exit diag-eth.  
Display this help text.  
Toggle uninterpreted data display.  
Toggle data timestamping.  
Begin data capturing.  
data  
timestamp  
go  
stop  
Terminate data capturing.  
Add a data filter.  
promiscuous Toggle promiscuous mode for the ethernet chip.  
filter  
This example displays the help associated with the Ethernet diagnostic filter  
command.  
[232]diag-eth  
filter  
Usage: FILTER <ADD|DELETE> [SRC <mac>] [DST <mac>]  
FILTER <ADD|DELETE> [SRC <ipAddr>] [DST <ipAddr>]  
FILTER <ADD|DELETE> [SRC <ipAddr#port>] [DST <ipAddr#port>]  
FILTER <ADD|DELETE> [SRC <*#port>] [DST <*#port>]  
FILTER <ADD|DELETE> PROTOCOL <IP|TCP|UDP|ICMP|ARP|OSI>  
FILTER <ADD|DELETE> ALL  
FILTER LIST  
Where:  
<mac>  
is the MAC address desired, with the format  
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX, with each 'X' representing  
a hexidecimal digit.  
<ipAddr>  
<port>  
is the desired IP address, with the format  
X.X.X.X, where 0 < X < 256.  
is the desired TCP port.  
8-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: diag-eth  
This example displays the diagnostic Ethernet display when the following parameters  
are entered:  
z interpret max to set maximum interpretation  
z timestamp to enable timestamping  
z promiscuous to enable promiscuous mode  
z filter add src 172.16.2.9 to add a filter for address 172.16.2.9  
z data to display data  
z go to start the data capture  
z stop to stop capturing data.  
[232]diag-eth  
interpret max  
Interpretation is now set to MAXIMUM.  
timestamp  
Timestamps will now be displayed.  
promiscuous  
The ethernet chip is now in promiscuous mode.  
filter add src 172.16.2.9  
New filter added.  
data  
Uninterpreted data will now be displayed.  
go  
----------------------------------------------------------------------  
Timestamp: 0d 00:31:25.356  
<- Ethernet: [ 00:40:72:00:7F:96 ] -> [ 00:00:0C:7E:F2:72 ]  
Protocol [ 0x0800:IP ]  
IP:  
[ 172.16.2.9 ] -> [ 172.16.0.1 ]  
Version [ 4 ]  
Header Length [ 20 bytes ]  
Type-Of-Service [ none ]  
Identifier [ 37903 ]  
Fragmentation Flags [ none ] Offset [ 0 bytes ]  
Time-To-Live [ 60 hops ]  
Protocol [ 0x01:ICMP ]  
ICMP:  
Type [ 8 ] Code [ 0 ]  
(echo request)  
00 00 48 44 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C  
4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 41 42  
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52  
53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48  
49 4A 4B 4C  
..HDABCDEFGHIJKL  
MNOPQRSTUVWXYZAB  
CDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR  
STUVWXYZABCDEFGH  
IJKL  
----------------------------------------------------------------------  
stop  
8-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: diag-eth  
This example displays the diagnostic Ethernet display when the following is entered:  
z filter add src 00:40:72:00:d2:d9to configure a filter with source MAC address  
00:40:72:00:d2:d9  
z filter add dst 00:40:72:00:d2:d9 to configure a filter with destination MAC  
address 00:40:72:00:d2:d9  
z go to start the capture  
z stop to end the capture.  
[232]diag-eth  
filter add src 00:40:72:00:d2:d9  
New filter added.  
filter add dst 00:40:72:00:d2:d9  
New filter added.  
go  
----------------------------------------------------------------------  
<- 01 80 C2 00 00 00 00 40 72 00 D2 D9 00 26 42 42  
03 00 00 00 00 81 00 20 00 40 72 00 D2 D9 00 00  
00 00 00 20 00 40 72 00 D2 D9 80 65 00 00 07 00  
09 00 0F 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
.......@r....&BB  
....... .@r.....  
... [email protected]....  
............  
----------------------------------------------------------------------  
<- 00 40 72 00 D2 D9 00 40 72 00 7F 96 08 00 45 00  
00 29 0F 81 00 00 3C 06 F4 8A AC 10 02 09 AC 10  
20 9A 04 16 00 17 75 87 E4 2F 30 E0 B6 B4 50 10  
08 00 A6 96 00 00 41 0D 01 B4 6D 74 01 B4 FF FC  
.@[email protected].  
.)....<.........  
.....u../0...P.  
......A...mt....  
----------------------------------------------------------------------  
<- stop  
This example displays the diagnostic Ethernet display when the following is entered:  
z filter add protocol tcp to configure a filter with a defined TCP protocol  
z go to start the capture  
z stop to end the capture.  
[232]diag-eth  
filter add protocol tcp  
New filter added.  
go  
----------------------------------------------------------------------  
<- 00 A0 C9 22 D8 C4 00 00 92 B6 2F 97 08 00 45 2C  
00 6C CF B7 40 00 80 06 69 4B AC 10 37 14 AC 10  
32 28 10 9A 00 8B 01 67 55 24 00 D0 5D 81 50 18  
1E 59 5C 61 00 00 00 00 00 40 FF 53 4D 42 2B 00  
00 00 00 18 03 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
00 00 07 08 FE CA 02 10 41 0F 01 01 00 1B 00 4C  
57 4F 20 43 57 20 56 4C 4F 20 44 45 4F 20 4D 41  
57 20 4C 4D 57 20 41 52 57 00  
..."....../...E,  
[email protected]...  
2(.....gU$..].P.  
.Y\[email protected]+.  
................  
........A......L  
WO CW VLO DEO MA  
W LMW ARW.  
----------------------------------------------------------------------  
stop  
8-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: diag-eth  
This example displays the diagnostic Ethernet display when filter list is entered to  
display all filters.  
[232]diag-eth  
filter list  
Filters currently being used by diag-eth:  
protocol tcp  
dst 00:40:72:00:d2:d9  
src 00:40:72:00:d2:d9  
dst 172.16.2.9  
src 172.16.2.9  
protocol tcp  
This example displays the deletion of filter protocol tcp.  
[232]diag-eth  
filter delete protocol tcp  
Filter 'protocol tcp' has been deleted.  
This example displays the deletion of all filters.  
[232]diag-eth  
filter delete all  
Filter 'dst 00:40:72:00:d2:d9' has been deleted.  
Filter 'src 00:40:72:00:d2:d9' has been deleted.  
Filter 'dst 172.16.2.9' has been deleted.  
Filter 'src 172.16.2.9' has been deleted.  
8-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: diag-info  
diag-info  
Description  
This command displays diagnostic information for asynchronous, Ethernet, and TCP  
connections as well as for memory. Different screens of information can be viewed  
depending on the command option that is entered. The screens display the state of  
serial links and system updates once per second. The available display options are M,  
A, E, and T. They display the following information:  
z
z
z
z
Option M displays the STREAMS allocation and memory information.  
Option A displays asynchronous information. This is the default display.  
Option E displays Ethernet information.  
Option T displays TCP data.  
ꢀ
Note: Type Xto exit the command display.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
diag-info  
8-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: diag-info  
Examples  
This example displays diagnostic information for STREAMS allocation and memory,  
which are accessed by typing M.  
S T R E A M S  
A L L O C A T I O N  
NAME  
Queues  
Streams  
FREE  
8361  
2085  
64  
ALLOC  
239  
115  
0
%FREE  
97  
94  
USED  
1073  
532  
FAIL  
HWM  
241  
116  
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bufcalls  
Timeouts  
Message blocks  
Data blocks:  
Class 0  
100  
99  
97  
0
2387  
16015  
13  
369  
402908  
588495  
45  
551  
1519  
4080  
14944  
9981  
500  
17  
16  
56  
19  
0
98  
99  
7954  
835  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
40  
18  
64  
32  
0
Class 1  
Class 2  
99  
99  
100  
60  
301866  
11034  
0
Class 3  
Class 4  
Class 5  
Class 6  
Extended  
390  
260  
1
0
222746  
1
263  
1
0
1
350  
50  
100  
0
S Y S T E M  
A L L O C A T I O N  
(alloc failed=0)  
USED USED_HWM UNIT_SIZE  
REGION:  
AI1  
AI2  
ASIZ CNT CNT_HWM  
741664  
741664  
741664  
324  
0
424  
0
17632  
0
20704  
0
180832  
32  
32  
32  
AI3  
32  
36 179296  
Enter M-emory, A-sync, E-thernet, T-cp or Q-uit:  
Column Description  
NAME  
Displays the name of the STREAMS resource.  
FREE  
Displays the number of free or available STREAMS resources.  
ALLOC  
Displays the number of STREAMS resources allocated at the time of  
the display.  
%FREE  
USED  
Displays the percentage of free or available STREAMS resources.  
Displays the number of STREAMS resources used since AI232 was  
last reset.  
FAIL  
HWM  
Displays the number of times an allocation failed.  
Displays the highest number of resources ever allocated at one time.  
Displays the memory allocation regions.  
REGION  
ASIZ  
CNT  
Displays the size of the memory allocation regions in bytes.  
Displays the number of blocks allocated from a region (regardless of  
size).  
8-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: diag-info  
Column Description  
CNT_HWM  
Displays the highest number of blocks allocated since AI232 was last  
reset.  
USED  
Displays the number of bytes currently allocated from a region.  
USED_HWM  
Displays the highest number of bytes allocated since AI232 was last  
reset.  
UNIT_SIZE  
Displays the size in bytes of the memory units that can be allocated.  
This example displays diagnostic information for asynchronous connections, which is  
accessed by typing A. This is the default display.  
ASYNC DIAG INFO  
LINK  
1
STATE  
BYTES_IN  
BYTES_OUT  
LINK  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
STATE  
BYTES_IN  
BYTES_OUT  
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
Enter M-emory, A-sync, E-thernet, T-cp or Q-uit:  
Column Description  
LINK  
Displays the link number.  
STATE  
Displays the state of the driver. Two states are available:  
z 0 specifies that the link is not established.  
z 1 specifies that the link is enabled. The link does not have to have a  
connection to be enabled.  
BYTE_IN  
Displays the number of bytes coming into the link.  
Displays the number of bytes going out of the link.  
BYTE_OUT  
8-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: diag-info  
This example displays diagnostic information for the front panel Ethernet interface,  
which is accessed by typing E.  
ETHERNET 0  
Rx LG frame length violation: ---0  
Rx NO nonoctet aligned frame: ---0  
Rx SH short frame (runt): -------0  
Rx CR CRC error: ----------------0  
Rx OV overrun: ------------------0  
Rx CL collision: ----------------0  
Rx BSY buffers exhausted: -------0  
Rx frames missed: ---------------0  
Rx frames received: -------------0  
Rx bytes received: --------------0  
Tx RL retry limit exceeded: -----0  
Tx RC collisions: ---------------0  
Tx UN underruns: ----------------0  
Tx LC late collisions:-----------0  
Tx CSL carrier sense lost: ------2451095  
Tx queued buffers: --------------0  
Tx frames sent: -----------------2451095  
Tx bytes sent: ------------------233814304  
Unexpected interrupts: ----------0  
Enter M-emory, A-sync, E-thernet, T-cp or Q-uit:  
Display Item  
Description  
Rx LG frame length violation  
Displays the number of frame length violations in  
received packets.  
Rx NO nonoctet aligned frame  
Rx SH short frame (runt)  
Rx CR CRC error  
Displays the number of misaligned, received frames.  
Displays the number of short received frames.  
Displays the number of packets received that have  
had CRC errors.  
Rx OV overrun  
Displays the number of packets not received by the  
interface because of a receiver overrun.  
Rx CL collision  
Displays the transmit collisions on received frames.  
This is the number of times the Ethernet device goes  
to transmit but cannot because someone else is  
already transmitting.  
Rx BSY buffers exhausted  
Rx frames missed  
Displays the number of times all receive buffers  
were used, but more were required.  
Displays the number of frames that were supposed  
to be received, but were missed.  
8-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: diag-info  
Display Item  
Description  
Rx frames received  
Displays the number of frames received on the  
connection.  
Rx bytes received  
Displays the number of bytes received on the  
connection.  
Tx RL retry limit exceeded  
Tx RC collisions  
Displays the number of times transmitted frames  
exceeded the retry limit.  
Displays the number of transmit collisions. This is  
the number of times the Ethernet device goes to  
transmit but cannot because someone else is  
already transmitting.  
Tx UN underruns  
This displays the number of times the transmitter  
has run out of data due to the system being busy.  
Tx LC late collisions  
Tx CSL carrier sense lost  
Displays the number of late collisions on transmitted  
frames.  
Displays the number of times that the carrier sense  
was lost.  
Tx queued buffers  
Tx frames sent  
Displays the number of queued buffers.  
Displays the number of frames that were  
transmitted.  
Tx bytes sent  
Displays the number of bytes that were transmitted.  
Unexpected interrupts  
Displays the number of times that the transfer of  
frames was unexpectedly interrupted.  
8-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: diag-info  
This example displays diagnostic information for the Ethernet sonic chip in use on this  
card (SONIC0), which is accessed by typing E.  
SONIC0  
frames_received  
bytes_received  
frames_sent  
2133706  
2451073  
204088549 233809600  
317511  
bytes_sent  
collisions  
38293966  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
116  
0
0
transmit_errors  
crc_errors  
alignment_errors  
missed_packets  
rx_buffers_exhausted 0  
0
0
heartbeatlost  
rx_overruns  
rba_exceeded  
current_tda  
ex_defers  
0
0
0
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
ex_coll  
tx_underruns  
bad_tx_size  
tx_blocked  
tx_delayed  
state  
0
0
2451086  
0
2451086  
eth intr stuck: 0----------------233812081  
Display Item  
Description  
frames_received  
bytes_received  
Displays the number of frames received on the connection.  
Displays the number of bytes received on the connection.  
ꢀ
Note: This field displays a negative number after it reaches  
a count of 2,147,483,647. This is normal operation  
and does not indicate an error.  
frames_sent  
bytes_sent  
Displays the number of frames sent from the connection.  
Displays the number of bytes sent from the connection.  
ꢀ
Note: This field displays a negative number after it reaches  
a count of 2,147,483,647. This is normal operation  
and does not indicate an error.  
collisions  
Displays the number of transmit collisions. This is the  
number of times the Ethernet device goes to transmit but  
cannot because someone else is already transmitting.  
transmit_errors  
Displays the number of transmit errors that have occurred.  
8-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: diag-info  
Display Item  
Description  
crc_errors  
Displays the number of packets received that have had CRC  
errors.  
alignment_errors  
missed_packets  
Displays the number of alignment errors.  
Displays the number of missed packets.  
rx_buffers_exhausted  
Displays the number of times all receive buffers were used,  
but more were required.  
heartbeatlost  
rx_overruns  
rba_exceeded  
Displays if there is an error between the Ethernet interface  
and the Ethernet transceiver.  
Displays the number of packets not received by the interface  
because of a receiver overrun.  
Displays the number of times that the maximum number of  
receive buffers have been exceeded.  
current_tda  
ex_defers  
Displays the current data area being transmitted.  
Displays the number of times that the maximum limit on the  
excessive deferral timer is exceeded. An excessive deferral  
error is recorded when the following events occur:  
z
A transmission attempt is made while another node is  
transmitting.  
z
The transmit period is longer than the excessive deferral  
timer limit.  
ex_coll  
Displays the number of times an excessive collision has  
been recorded. An excessive collision is recorded when a  
transmit attempt occurs 16 times and a collision occurs each  
time.  
tx_underruns  
bad_tx_size  
tx_blocked  
tx_delayed  
Displays the number of times the transmitter has run out of  
data due to the system being busy.  
Displays the number of times the transmit byte count was  
incorrect.  
Displays a 1 if the transmitter is blocked. Otherwise, a 0 is  
displayed.  
Displays the number of times the transmitter has been  
blocked.  
8-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: diag-info  
Display Item  
Description  
state  
Displays the current state of the Ethernet interface. The  
following values may appear:  
z 0—The Ethernet interface is uninitialized.  
z 1—The Ethernet interface is idle.  
z 2—The Ethernet interface is active.  
z 3—The Ethernet interface needs to be reset.  
eth intr stuck  
Displays the number of times the Ethernet interface interrupt  
has stuck while servicing the interrupt.  
This example displays diagnostic information for TCP data, which is accessed by  
typing T.  
T C P / I P  
I N F O  
Copied ethernet receive packet:  
TCP keepalive failed:  
0
0
1
0
TCP max keepalive tries:  
Dropped SNMP request:  
Enter M-emory, A-sync, E-thernet, T-cp or Q-uit:  
Display Item  
Description  
Copied ethernet receive packet:  
Displays the number of copied Ethernet receive  
packets.  
TCP keepalive failed:  
Displays the number of TCP keep-alive  
messages that have been sent and were  
expected to be received, but were not received.  
TCP max keepalive tries:  
Dropped SNMP request:  
Displays the maximum number of TCP keep-alive  
messages received on the connection.  
Displays the number of dropped SNMP requests.  
8-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: diag-line  
diag-line  
Description  
This command monitors incoming and outgoing asynchronous traffic and displays  
diagnostic information for the traffic. A help screen provides a list of commands  
available for line monitoring diagnostics.  
CAUTION: The line monitor degrades the performance of AI232. Do not use this  
command in heavy traffic situations in which performance is crucial.  
ꢀ
Note: Information from the line monitor diagnostic mode only appears when data is  
passed on serial links. If no data is passed, the screen is blank.  
Table 8-2 displays the line monitor mode options that can be entered after diag-line  
is entered.  
Table 8-2 Line Monitor Mode Options  
Option  
data  
modem  
t
Function  
Toggles the display of data on or off.  
Toggles the display of modem signals on or off.  
Toggles the display of a timestamp for each frame of data  
displayed on or off.  
h or r  
Hides (h) or reveals (r) all lines on AI232.  
Hides (h) or reveals (r) a specified line (x).  
Reveals a specified LCN (y) on a specified line (x).  
h lx or r lx  
r lx y  
r lx y z  
Reveals a range of specified LCNs (y through z) on a  
specified line (x).  
h lx y - or r lx y -  
Hides or reveals all LCNs from a specified LCN (y) on up on a  
specified line (x).  
h lx -y or r lx -y  
Hides or reveals all LCNs from 0 to a specified LCN (y) on a  
specified line (x).  
filterL2  
Toggles the filtering of level 2 frames without packet  
information on or off.  
8-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: diag-line  
Table 8-2 Line Monitor Mode Options (Continued)  
Option  
Function  
interpret [ a | x ]  
Toggles the display of decoded packet data on the line  
monitor on or off and optionally selects the format of the data  
in the data portion of the packet (a or x).  
z a displays the data in the data portion of the packet in  
ASCII/hexadecimal format. Unprintable data  
(hexadecimal values 0x00 to 0x20 and 0x7F to 0xFF)  
appears as two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by  
a space. Printable data appears as printable characters.  
This option only applies to data.  
z x displays all the data in the data portion of the packet in  
hexadecimal format. All data appears as two-digit  
hexadecimal numbers separated by a space. This option  
only applies to data.  
print  
Prints the range of revealed LCNs for all lines.  
Pauses the line monitor.  
CTRL+s  
go or CTRL+q  
Reactivates the line monitor after displaying the line monitor  
options.  
ESC or q  
Quits monitoring traffic, exits from the line monitor, and  
returns to the prompt.  
?
Displays a list of the options available for line monitoring  
diagnostics.  
Tip: Press ENTER to execute a command and press ESC to end the diagnostic  
session.  
CAUTION: If you are connected to AI232 through a serial port, do not monitor the  
port with command diag-line. Use command hideto hide and not  
monitor the port. Failure to comply with this statement can cause AI232  
to become unresponsive.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
diag-line  
8-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: diag-line  
Examples  
This example displays a typical default line monitor display for asynchronous data.  
06>d FF 03 00 31 00 01 FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 00 92 9B  
59 0C 08 06 00 01 08 00 06 04 00 01 00 00 92 9B  
59 0C AC 10 32 05 00 00 00 00 00 00 AC 10 22 79  
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
00 00  
...1............  
Y...............  
Y...2........."y  
................  
..  
06<d FF 03 02 01 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 40 72 00 6F  
77 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 40 72 00 6F 77 80 04 00  
00 14 00 02 00 0F 00  
[email protected]  
[email protected]...  
.......  
06>d FF 03 00 31 00 01 FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 10 4B D0  
D3 5D 08 06 00 01 08 00 06 04 00 01 00 10 4B D0  
D3 5D AC 10 33 D1 00 00 00 00 00 00 AC 10 20 EB  
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
00 00  
...1..........K.  
.]............K.  
.]..3......... .  
................  
..  
06>d FF 03 00 31 00 01 FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 10 4B D0  
D3 5D 08 06 00 01 08 00 06 04 00 01 00 10 4B D0  
D3 5D AC 10 33 D1 00 00 00 00 00 00 AC 10 1E 82  
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
00 00  
...1..........K.  
.]............K.  
.]..3...........  
................  
..  
Column  
Description  
Line number  
Displays the line number, which can range from 01 to 32.  
Direction indicator  
Displays the direction indicator for the line. One of the  
following appears:  
z > for transmitted frames  
z < for received frames.  
Frame type indicator Displays the frame type indicator for the line. One of the  
following appears:  
z d for asynchronous links  
z
Blank for other frames or packets.  
Data  
If the data field byte count is disabled, it gets displayed as  
ct: <# of bytes in data field>. If the data display is enabled  
and only present in data packets, then the data byte count is  
displayed as <ASCII STRING>.  
8-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: diag-tconn  
diag-tconn  
Description  
This command displays a list of enabled links along with connection information for  
each link. It displays all connections on AI232 in the same format as command diag-  
conn on page 8-34, but it is not interactive.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
diag-tconn  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport diag-tconn  
Parameters  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI232.  
Examples  
This example displays active connections on AI232. This is a partial display. The rest  
of the response follows the pattern below for the remaining connections.  
[232] diag-tconn  
TIDMUXsw#1  
13:26:30 040900 Sev=F Base=032 Msg:  
AI232 Complete Connections Dump:  
1. PARENT2  
3. TCP 172.16.31.45#5001  
TID(s): SONEPLEX-NE3  
<-----> 32.ASY.2.1  
<-----> PARENT2.1  
SONEPLEX-NE4  
15. TCP 192.168.31.15#5001  
TID(s): NE4-DAYTON-OH  
NE7-DAYTON-OH  
<-----> PARENT2.2  
NE5-DAYTON-OH  
NE8-DAYTON-OH  
NE6-DAYTON-OH  
NE9-DAYTON-OH  
[232]  
ꢀ
Note: The connection ID is the first number that appears for each connection. For  
example, the connection ID for connection PARENT2 is 1.  
8-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: dir  
dir  
Description  
This command displays a list of files with associated times, dates, permissions, and  
sizes.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
dir [ -l ]  
Parameters  
-l  
Displays a list of the available files and file information such as permission,  
time, date, and file size. The lscommand with this option is the same as the  
dircommand.  
Examples  
This example displays all available files.  
[232]dir  
boot.ini  
boot.img  
232.img  
log.txt  
primary.cnf  
[232]  
This example displays all available files with permission, size, time, and date  
information.  
[232]dir -l  
-rw-r--r--  
-r--r--r--  
-rw-r--r--  
-rw-r--r--  
-rw-r--r--  
[232]  
1 0  
1 0  
1 0  
1 0  
1 0  
0
0
0
0
0
143 Jun 1 22:52 boot.ini  
2175720 Aug 15 09:54 boot.img  
22061 Jun 1 00:00 log.txt  
4342 Aug 15 08:21 core.txt  
7092 Jun 13 22:46 primary.cnf  
8-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: exit  
exit  
Description  
This command ends the current shell session and returns to the login prompt.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
exit  
Examples  
This example displays an exit from the current shell session.  
[232]exit  
Writing Configuration ...  
Goodbye.  
Valid destinations are as follows:  
AI  
Enter destination name (or "EXIT" to logout):  
>
8-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: head  
head  
Description  
This command displays the first few lines of a file.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
head [ -n lines ] file_name ...  
Parameters  
[ -nlines] Defines the number of lines to display. The default is 20.  
file_name  
Defines the name of the file to display.  
ꢀ
Note: Several filenames can be entered with this command.  
Examples  
This example displays the first 30 lines of file core.txt.  
[232] head -n 30 core.txt  
Crash Code= 00000025  
PC= 000e72d8  
SP= 01ca2140  
IMMR= ff000031  
MSR= 00000002  
GPR00= 00000025  
GPR03= 002295c4  
GPR06= 00000064  
GPR09= 002c0000  
GPR12= 01ca20b8  
GPR15= 00000001  
GPR18= 0000000a  
GPR21= 01bf5738  
GPR24= 00000001  
GPR27= 00000055  
GPR30= 01ca2198  
CR= 22000000  
GPR01= 00000001  
GPR04= 00000025  
GPR07= 00000005  
GPR10= 002c0000  
GPR13= 01bf5738  
GPR16= 0a000069  
GPR19= 00000055  
GPR22= 01ca2110  
GPR25= 00000001  
GPR28= 00000069  
GPR31= 00000005  
GPR02= 0025c980  
GPR05= 002295e8  
GPR08= 0effffff  
GPR11= 0027a7d4  
GPR14= 01ca2128  
GPR17= 01ca2188  
GPR20= 00000063  
GPR23= 0001cc08  
GPR26= 01ca2110  
GPR29= 00000002  
SSR0= 000e72d8  
XER= 0000b020  
SSR1= 00009002  
CTR= 00000000  
LR= 000f4894  
PVR= 00500000  
Stack dump:  
PSOS1= 000346fc PSOS2= 01ca20a8  
PSOS3= 0001cbb0  
Caller  
000f3c8c  
01ca2140: 01ca 2180 000f 3c8c 7573 6167 653a 2025  
01ca2150: 7320 3c70 6173 7377 6f72 643e 0a00 0c00  
01ca2160: 01ca 2180 000f 3c8c 0000 0001 0000 0000  
01ca2170: 0000 0000 01f4 5274 0000 0007 0027 ab6c  
01ca2180: 01ca 21f0 000e d294 01f4 5274 0000 0200  
01ca2190: 0000 0055 0000 000b 01d3 533c 01d3 5342  
01ca21a0: 0000 01fc 0000 0004 0000 0001 0005 0374  
[232]  
000ed294  
8-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: help  
help  
Description  
This command lists all available system commands or information for a specific  
command.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
help [ command ]  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport help [ command ]  
Parameters  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI232.  
command  
Defines the name of the command for which specific information will be  
displayed.  
Examples  
This example displays a list of all available commands.  
[232]help  
The following commands are available:  
*ftplogin  
*telnetlogin  
alarm  
arp  
break  
diag-tconn  
dir  
modmux  
more  
staslc  
syncflash  
tail  
tcpoutconn  
tftp  
exit  
head  
help  
id  
ip  
link  
log  
logout  
ls  
menu  
passwd  
ping  
pppstatus  
profile  
pvclist  
reset  
creset  
debug  
delete  
tftpboot  
type  
useradd  
userdel  
users  
diag-conn  
diag-eth  
diag-info  
diag-line  
sholog  
show  
staeia  
standalone  
who  
[232]  
This example displays help information for command show.  
[232]help show  
Usage: show [perf | comments | conn | data | mem | tcp | tconn | pvc |  
eth | ip | router | version | log | crash | inventory | ports]  
[232]  
8-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: id  
id  
Description  
This command displays the current user name and profile.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
id  
Examples  
This example displays the current user name and profile.  
[232]id  
Username: 'pubs'  
Profile: 'supervisor'  
[232]  
8-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: ip  
ip  
Description  
This command displays the following system settings:  
z
z
z
z
z
IP address  
Subnet mask  
High IP address  
Primary router IP address  
Backup router IP address  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
ip  
Examples  
This example displays the configured IP address information.  
[232]ip  
IP Address  
Subnet Mask High IP Address  
-------------------------------------------------------  
010.040.057.012  
255.255.000.000  
010.040.057.012  
Router IP Address  
-------------------------  
010.040.000.001 (Default)  
No backup router  
[232]  
8-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: ip init  
ip init  
ꢀ
Note: This command is only valid when AI232 is in standalone mode.  
Description  
This command configures the following settings for AI232 in standalone mode:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
IP address  
Subnet mask  
High IP address  
Primary gateway address  
Backup gateway address  
IP address range  
CAUTION: The following message appears when the “ip init” command is invoked  
and no login ports are configured:  
There are no login ports currently configured for this system. Please take  
necessary precautions to prevent lockout.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
ip init  
Examples  
This example displays the prompt that appears when ip initis entered. A prompt  
appears for each configurable IP address item.  
[232] ip init  
Enter IP Address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx):  
8-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: ip init  
This example displays the configuration of all the IP settings available with this  
command:  
[232] ip init  
Enter IP Address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx):172.16.2.39  
Setting IP Address to 172.16.2.39  
Enter Subnet Mask (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx):255.255.000.000  
Setting Subnet Mask to 255.255.000.000  
Enter Router Address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx):172.16.000.1  
Setting Router Address to 172.16.000.1  
Enter Backup Router Address (default none):172.16.2.41  
Setting Backup Router Address to 172.16.2.41  
Enter IP Address Range (default 1):  
Setting range to 1  
[232]  
8-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: link  
link  
Description  
This command is used to:  
z
Force a serial link to connect or disconnect  
ꢀ
Note: When this command is used to disconnect a serial link, all calls are torn  
down. The serial link does not come back online until command link  
startis issued.  
Important: If you are connected to the AI232 shell using a serial port, remember  
not to disable that port or else loss of connectivity will result.  
z
z
Restart a link, which is a stop followed by a start  
Show a configuration summary for a link or range of links.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
link { link_range | * } { start | stop | restart }  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport link { link_range | * } { start | stop | restart }  
Parameters  
link_range  
Defines a link or range of links. Valid values are 1 to 32. Individual  
values are separated by commas (,) and hyphens (-). For example,  
1,4-6 specifies links 1, 4, 5, and 6.  
ꢀ
Note: This parameter applies to any action the user is trying  
perform (start, stop, restart, or show information).  
*
Specifies all links.  
start  
Enables the serial links.  
stop  
Disables the serial links.  
restart  
Restarts the serial links.  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI232.  
8-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: link  
Examples  
This example displays the starting of links 1 through 4 and 6.  
[232]link 1-4,6 start  
[232]  
This example displays the stopping of links 6 and 8.  
[232]link 6,8 stop  
[232]  
8-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: log  
log  
Description  
This command turns the display of log messages on or off.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
log { on | off }  
Parameters  
on  
Specifies the option that turns the display of log messages on.  
off  
Specifies the option that turns the display of log messages off.  
Examples  
This example displays the current status of the log message display.  
[232]log  
Display of log messages is currently disabled.  
[232]  
This example displays the activation of the log message display.  
[232]log on  
Display of log messages is now enabled.  
[232]  
This example displays the deactivation of log message display.  
[232] log off  
Display of log messages is now disabled.  
[232]  
8-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: logout  
logout  
Description  
This command closes a shell session.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
logout  
Examples  
This example displays the closing of a shell session.  
[232]logout  
Writing Configuration ...  
Goodbye.  
** Disconnecting **  
8-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: ls  
ls  
Description  
This command displays a list of available files.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
ls [ -l ]  
Parameters  
-l  
Displays a list of the available files and file information such as permission,  
time, date, and size.  
ꢀ
Note: Entering lswith this option is the same as entering dir.  
Examples  
This example displays all available files.  
[232]ls  
boot.ini  
boot.img  
log.txt  
core.txt  
primary.cnf  
[232]  
This example displays all available files with associated permission levels, times,  
dates, and sizes.  
[232]ls -l  
-rw-r--r--  
-r--r--r--  
-rw-r--r--  
-rw-r--r--  
-rw-r--r--  
[232]  
1 0  
1 0  
1 0  
1 0  
1 0  
0
0
0
0
0
143 Jun 1 22:52 boot.ini  
2175720 Aug 15 10:05 boot.img  
22061 Jun 1 00:00 log.txt  
4342 Aug 15 08:21 core.txt  
7092 Jun 13 22:46 primary.cnf  
8-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: menu  
menu  
Description  
This command accesses the AI232 main menu system.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
menu  
Examples  
This example displays the AI232 Main Menu.  
AI232 Main Menu  
+ Link Menu  
+ Alias Menu  
+ System Menu  
+ Static Route Menu  
....................................................................  
:
:
: Select the desired menu option using the UP or DOWN arrow key. :  
: Then press ENTER or RETURN to continue.  
:..................................................................:  
:
<F1> Help  
<F4> Close  
CAUTION: The following message appears in the shell when the user exits the main  
menu and has the last login port disabled:  
There are no login ports currently configured for this system. Please take  
necessary precautions to prevent lockout.  
This message is only seen when the system is running in standalone  
mode.  
8-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: modmux  
modmux  
Description  
This command displays the status of links in the modem pool.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
modmux  
Examples  
This example displays the status of links in the modem pool.  
[232]modmux  
Link  
1:  
3:  
5:  
6:  
Current Status  
Idle  
Idle  
Conn Up Time  
0:06:13  
Init String  
Connected  
Idle  
ATDT 555-1212  
19:  
24:  
29:  
30:  
Disabled  
Connected  
Idle  
0:13:09  
AT\n|ATDT 555-1234  
Disabled  
[232]  
Column  
Description  
Link  
Displays link numbers.  
Current Status  
Displays the statuses of links. The following values are  
possible:  
z Disabled indicates that the link has been disabled  
by a user.  
z Idle indicates that the link is waiting for a  
connection to make an outgoing call.  
z Connected indicates that the protocol connected to  
the link and the modem made an outgoing call.  
Conn Up Time  
Displays the up time for the connection.  
ꢀ
Note: This column is only displayed if the link state is  
Connected.  
8-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: modmux  
Column  
Description  
Init String  
Displays the phone number that was dialed.  
ꢀ
Note: This column is only displayed if the link state is  
Connected.  
8-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: more  
more  
Description  
This command prints the content of a file to the current shell session one page at a  
time.  
ꢀ
Note: You cannot use this command to view code image files or configuration files  
(.img and .cnf extensions).  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
more filename  
Examples  
This example displays the contents of file log.txt one page at a time.  
[232]more log.txt  
00:00:17 060100 Sev=F Msg:  
Starting 232 in CLC mode.  
00:00:17 060100 Sev=F Msg:  
Pre-release code  
Version 32HPA920.000135 created on 2000-06-27 at 15:27:37  
Product Version *AI 232 Version 9.20. This is PRE-RELEASE code.  
00:00:19 060100 Sev=F Msg:  
SNMP Research SNMP Agent Resident Module Version 12.3.0.3  
Copyright 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 SNMP Research, Inc.  
00:00:34 060100 Sev=F Msg:  
232 initialization complete.  
10:13:24 073100 Sev=F Msg:  
Version 32HPA920.000135 created on 2000-06-27 at 15:27:37  
Boot Loader Version 32B2L100.000015  
10:14:22 073100 Sev=F Msg:  
User ai has logged into the Destination Menu.  
10:14:25 073100 Sev=F Msg:  
User ai has entered the shell.  
Press Space for more or q to quit:  
8-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: panic  
panic  
Description  
This command forces AI232 to crash dump and halt.  
Command Type  
winslc  
Formats  
winslc baseport panic  
Parameters  
baseport  
Defines the AI232 baseport number.  
8-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: passwd  
passwd  
Description  
This command changes an existing user’s password.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
passwd  
ꢀ
Note: After the initial command is entered, AI232 prompts the user for  
information needed to configure the new password.  
Examples  
This example displays the configuration of a new password for existing user pubs.  
[232]passwd  
Please enter the login name of the user  
whose password is being changed.  
pubs  
Please enter the OLD password for user 'pubs'.  
Please enter the NEW password.  
Passwords are truncated at 10 characters.  
Please retype NEW password.  
Password successfully changed.  
[232]  
8-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: ping  
ping  
Description  
This command sends an ICMP echo request to the specified IP address. If the IP  
device responds to the echo request, a reply receipt message appears. If a reply is  
not received within 5 seconds, a no reply message appears. This command can be  
used to troubleshoot network level problems.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
ping ip_address  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport ping ip_address  
Parameters  
ip_address  
Defines the IP address of the destination device in dotted decimal  
format.  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI232.  
Examples  
This example displays what happens when host 172.16.30.110 replies to a ping.  
[232] ping 172.16.30.110  
Pinging host 172.16.30.110  
ICMP Echo Reply:TTL 60  
Host 172.16.30.110 replied to the ping  
The TTL (time-to-live) is the number of jumps or hops the message is allowed to take.  
This example displays what happens when no reply is received from host  
172.16.30.114.  
[232] ping 172.16.30.114  
Pinging host 172.16.30.114  
Host 172.16.30.114 didn't reply to the ping  
8-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: pppstatus  
pppstatus  
Description  
This command displays the status of all ModMux and asynchronous PPP-IPCP links.  
If IPCP is running on the link (the link status is RUNNING), this command also displays  
the local and remote IP addresses.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
pppstatus  
Examples  
This example displays the status of all PPP-IPCP links.  
[232] pppstatus  
Link Phase  
1: ESTABLISH  
14: SERIALCONN  
[232]  
Local IP Addr. Remote IP Addr.  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Column  
Link  
Description  
Displays the link number.  
Phase  
Displays the status of the link. Values are:  
z INITIALIZE—Indicates the link is down.  
z SERIALCONN—Indicates the link is up, but not connected. The  
link is waiting for the data carrier detect (DCD) signal or the  
data set ready (DSR) signal to come up.  
z ESTABLISH—Indicates the link is up, but not connected. The  
AI232 and the remote device are negotiating basic  
information on how the connection will operate.  
z AUTHENTICATE—Indicates the link is up, but not connected. The  
link is validating ID and password information with the remote  
device.  
z NETWORK—Indicates the link is up, but not connected. The link  
is negotiating the local and remote IP addresses.  
z RUNNING—Indicates the link is up and connected. IPCP is  
running on the link. The AI232 and the remote device can  
transfer IP packets over the link.  
8-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: pppstatus  
Column  
Description  
Local IP Addr.  
Displays one of the following:  
The IP address of AI232 (if the link status is RUNNING)  
z
z N/A (if the link status is INITIALIZE, SERIALCONN, ESTABLISH,  
AUTHENTICATE, or NETWORK)  
Remote IP Addr.  
Displays one of the following:  
z
The IP address of the remote device (if the link status is  
RUNNING)  
z N/A (if the link status is INITIALIZE, SERIALCONN, ESTABLISH,  
AUTHENTICATE, or NETWORK)  
8-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: profile  
profile  
Description  
This command allows a user account profile to be customized. The following six  
system profiles are maintained:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
Supervisor  
Management  
Status  
Empty  
Destination menu  
Connect  
Profile names are limited to 19 characters. Only 20 user configurable profiles are  
allowed to be configured at the same time.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
profile -n  
profile -l profile_name  
profile -c existing_profile new_profile  
profile -a profile_name [ commands [ -w ] ] ...  
profile -d profile_name [ commands ] ...  
profile -remove [ profile_name ]  
Parameters  
-n  
Lists all user profile names.  
-l  
Lists all commands associated with a specific user profile.  
profile_name  
Defines the name of a user profile.  
-c  
Creates a new profile from an existing user profile.  
existing_profile  
Specifies the name of an existing user profile.  
new_profile  
Defines the name of a new user profile.  
8-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: profile  
-a  
Adds commands to a profile and optionally adds write  
permission.  
command  
-w  
Defines the name of a command to associate with a user  
profile.  
Adds write permission for a command that otherwise would  
not have write permission.  
-d  
Deletes commands from a user profile.  
Removes a user profile.  
-remove  
Examples  
This example displays each of the profile parameter options with associated  
functionality.  
[232]profile  
Usage: profile -n  
to list profile names  
: profile -l <profile name>  
to list all commands associated with a given profile  
: profile -c <existing profile name> <new profile name>  
to create a new profile from an existing profile  
: profile -a <profile name> [commands [-w]]...  
to add commands to a profile and possibly add write permission  
: profile -d <profile name> [commands]...  
to delete commands from a profile  
: profile -remove <profile name>  
to completely remove a profile  
[232]  
8-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: pvclist  
pvclist  
Description  
This command lists the PVCs in the system and displays their current state. If there  
are many PVCs in the system, this command redirects its output to a file named  
pvc.lst for easier viewing.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
pvclist [ link_range | * ]  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport pvclist [ link_range ]  
Parameters  
link_range  
Defines a link or range of links. Valid values are 1 to 32. Individual  
values are separated by commas (,) and hyphens (-). For example,  
1,4-6 specifies links 1, 4, 5, and 6.  
*
Specifies all links.  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI232.  
Examples  
This example displays PVC information for link 1.  
[232] pvclist 1  
[PVC list]  
+asy.1.1  
[232]  
passive ASD: state=idle  
muxid=0  
fd=107  
flags=0041  
Column  
First column  
Description  
Displays the PVC protocol type, link number, and LCN (logical  
channel number).  
8-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: pvclist  
Column  
Description  
Second column Displays the timer type for the PVC. Possible values are:  
z ct—Displays the connect timer if the PVC is active. The  
number indicates the timer setting in seconds.  
z it—Displays the inactivity timer if the PVC is a connect-on-  
activity PVC. The number indicates the timer setting in  
seconds.  
z Passive—Appears if the PVC is a passive type of PVC.  
Third column  
Defines the state of the PVC. Possible values are:  
z idle—Indicates the PVC is ready to connect.  
z dataxfer—Indicates the PVC is connected and able to pass  
data.  
z incon—Indicates the PVC is in a transition state.  
z attaching—Indicates the PVC is in a transition state.  
z not attached—Indicates that the PVC is not connected.  
z detached—Indicates the PVC is in a transition state.  
If the display indicates one of the transition states, this should  
only appear for a short period of time. If the state remains in this  
condition, contact Technical Support.  
Fourth column  
Fifth column  
Sixth column  
Defines the MuxID, which is an internal number used by  
developers to describe which data stream is used for the  
connection.  
Defines the file descriptor, which is an integer value used by  
developers to describe which data stream is used for the  
connection.  
Defines the flag, which gives a code that indicates the purpose of  
the data stream.  
8-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: reset  
reset  
Description  
This command resets AI232.  
CAUTION: All call processing will stop and all connections will be lost during the  
reboot process.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
reset  
Examples  
This example displays the resetting of AI232.  
[232] reset  
Are you SURE you want to reset the system? (y/n) y  
8-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: router  
router  
Description  
This command sets a default router in Menu 4.18 of the AI198 menu system. AI232  
uses the default router when a static route has not been specified.  
ꢀ
Note: This address can also be set in Menu 4.2.14 of the AI198 menu system. If the  
address is entered in both menus, Menu 4.18 takes precedence.  
Command Type  
winslc  
Formats  
router ip_address  
Parameters  
ip_address  
Defines the IP address of the default router.  
Examples  
This example displays a router address of 172.016.000.001defined in Menu 4.18 of the  
AI198 Menu System. This command can only be used in Menu 4.18.  
>1 router 172.016.000.001  
Menu 4.18 pg 1  
01 router 172.016.000.001  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
16 Previous page [,page]  
17 Next page  
18 Insert line  
19 Delete line  
20 Retain these changes for saving  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
8-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: router  
Usage Notes  
The router address takes effect after AI232 is booted. After booting, the address no  
longer appears in Menu 4.18. However, the address is stored on the AI198 and can  
be viewed or changed in Menu 4.2.14.  
ꢀ
Note: View the router IP address with command winslcbaseportshow router.  
8-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: selcnf  
selcnf  
ꢀ
Note: This command is only available for AI232 in standalone mode.  
Description  
This command has two forms: One allows for the recovery of an overwritten runtime  
configuration file and the other allows for the deletion of the specified configuration  
file. Any configuration file (with a .cnf extension) can be used for system boot up. The  
configuration file is written to boot.ini.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
selcnf -r  
selcnf -d config_file  
Parameters  
-r  
Specifies the option that recovers the current overwritten run-time  
configuration file.  
-d  
Specifies the option that deletes a configuration file.  
config_file  
Defines a configuration file for deletion; it must end with a .cnf  
extension.  
Examples  
This example displays the available options for command selcnf.  
[232]selcnf  
usage: selcnf -r  
selcnf [-d] <config_file>  
Selects the specified config file for current configuration.  
Options:  
-r  
-d  
Recovers the current over-written run-time config file  
Deletes the specified configuration file  
[232]  
8-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: sholog  
sholog  
Description  
This command displays the contents of the log file. The last 32,000 characters of log  
messages that were sent to the log port are displayed.  
ꢀ
Note: This command has the same functionality as command show log.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
sholog -p  
Parameters  
-p  
Displays the content of the file one page at a time.  
ꢀ
Note: This option is not available with command show log.  
Examples  
This example displays the contents of an AI232 log file one page at a time.  
[232]sholog -p  
:26 072304 Sev=F Msg:  
PPPD Phase Change: (Link 4) DISCONNECT -> INITIALIZE  
09:01:26 072304 Sev=F Msg:  
PPPD Phase Change: (Link 4) INITIALIZE -> SERIALCONN  
09:01:27 072304 Sev=F Msg:  
PPPD Phase Change: (Link 4) SERIALCONN -> ESTABLISH  
09:01:57 072304 Sev=F Msg:  
PPPD Phase Change: (Link 4) ESTABLISH -> DEAD  
09:01:57 072304 Sev=F Msg:  
PPPD Phase Change: (Link 4) DEAD -> DISCONNECT  
09:01:57 072304 Sev=F Msg:  
PPPD Phase Change: (Link 4) DISCONNECT -> INITIALIZE  
09:01:57 072304 Sev=F Msg:  
PPPD Phase Change: (Link 4) INITIALIZE -> SERIALCONN  
09:01:58 072304 Sev=F Msg:  
PPPD Phase Change: (Link 4) SERIALCONN -> ESTABLISH  
Press Space for more or q to quit:  
8-86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: show  
show  
Description  
This command displays various types of information for AI232.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
show [ perf [ link_range | * ] | comments | conn | data [ link_range  
| * ] | mem | tcp | tconn | pvc | eth | ip | router | version | log |  
crash | inventory | ports [ link_range | * ] ]  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport show [ perf [ link_range | * ] | comments | conn |  
data [ link_range | * ] | mem | tcp | tconn | pvc | eth | ip | router  
| version | log | crash | inventory | ports [ link_range | * ] ]  
Parameters  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI232.  
perf  
Displays serial link performance.  
link_range  
Defines a link or range of links. Valid values are 1 to 32. Individual  
values are separated by commas (,) and hyphens (-). For example,  
1,4-6 specifies links 1, 4, 5, and 6.  
*
Specifies all links.  
comments  
Displays comments.  
conn  
Displays all active connections.  
data  
Displays link data.  
mem  
Displays memory allocation.  
tcp  
Displays TCP information (Ethernet retry packet, keep-alive tries,  
dropped SNMP requests).  
tconn  
Displays complete connections.  
pvc  
Displays pvc connections.  
eth  
Displays Ethernet information.  
8-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: show  
ip  
Displays the IP address, subnet mask, and high IP address.  
router  
version  
date  
Displays the default and backup gateway IP address.  
Displays the version number of AI232.  
Displays the date and time.  
log  
Displays the contents of the log file, same as command sholog.  
Displays crash dump information.  
crash  
inventory  
ports  
Displays the serial number, product name, and manufacture date.  
Displays the link number, link type, and description for all available  
ports or for a specified range of ports.  
Examples  
This example displays the AI232 version number.  
[232]show version  
Version 32HPA950.000009 created on 2004-05-04 at 08:43:02  
Boot Loader Version 32B2L105.000044  
[232]  
This example displays the serial link performance for links 2-5.  
[232]show perf 2-5  
Performance for last 60 seconds:  
Intrf Type Input Chars/sec  
Output Chars/sec  
0
2
3
4
5
ASY  
ASY  
ASY  
ASY  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Intrf Type Input Chars/sec  
[232]  
Output Chars/sec  
This example displays the link numbers, link types, and descriptions for ports 21-23.  
[232]show ports 21-23  
Link Type Description  
21: ASY Async link 21  
22: ASY Async link 22  
23: ASY Async link 23  
[232]  
8-88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: staeia  
staeia  
Description  
This command displays the status of the EIA leads.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
staeia { link_range | * }  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport staeia { link_range | * }  
Parameters  
link_range  
Defines a link or range of links. Valid values are 1 to 32. Individual  
values are separated by commas (,) and hyphens (-). For example,  
1,4-6 specifies links 1, 4, 5, and 6.  
*
Specifies all links.  
baseport  
Defines the baseport of AI232.  
Examples  
This example displays the status of the EIA leads for links 1 to 5.  
[232] staeia 1-5  
Link Type Status  
IN  
DSR DCD CTS  
OUT  
DTR RTS  
1: ASY Disabled  
2: ASY Enabled  
3: ASY Enabled  
4: ASY Enabled  
5: ASY Disabled  
[232]  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
Column Description  
DSR  
DSR is an incoming EIA lead control signal. The plus symbol (+)  
indicates that this lead is asserted. The minus symbol (-) indicates that  
the lead is negated.  
8-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: staeia  
Column Description  
DCD  
CTS  
DTR  
RTS  
DCD is an incoming EIA lead control signal. The plus symbol (+)  
indicates that this lead is asserted. The minus symbol (-) indicates that  
the lead is negated.  
CTS is an incoming EIA lead control signal. The plus symbol (+)  
indicates that this lead is asserted. The minus symbol (-) indicates that  
the lead is negated.  
DTR is an outgoing EIA lead control signal. The plus symbol (+)  
indicates that this lead is asserted. The minus symbol (-) indicates that  
the lead is negated.  
RTS is an outgoing EIA lead control signal. The plus symbol (+)  
indicates that this lead is asserted. The minus symbol (-) indicates that  
the lead is negated.  
8-90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: standalone  
standalone  
Description  
This command enables or disables standalone mode. For more information about the  
difference between standalone mode and switch mode, refer to Appendix B:  
Standalone Mode and Switch Mode.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
standalone { true | false }  
Parameters  
true  
Puts AI232 in standalone mode.  
false  
Takes AI232 out of standalone mode.  
Examples  
This example displays the current standalone mode status.  
[232]standalone  
Currently forced standalone mode is OFF.  
Currently running in switch mode.  
[232]  
This example displays the configuration of standalone mode for AI232.  
[232]standalone true  
[232]  
8-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: staslc  
staslc  
Description  
This command displays the status of the links and the DP232 cable.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
staslc { link_range | * }  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport staslc { link_range | * }  
Parameters  
link_range  
Defines a link or range of links. Valid values are 1 to 32. Individual  
values are separated by commas (,) and hyphens (-). For example,  
1,4-6 specifies links 1, 4, 5, and 6.  
*
Specifies all links.  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI232.  
8-92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: staslc  
Examples  
This example displays the link and cable status information for links 1 to 5.  
[232]staslc 1-5  
Link  
1:  
Status Appl. DTR RTS CTS DSR DCD Format  
Parity Frame Overun Underun  
Idle Login  
+
?
?
?
+
?
?
?
-
?
?
?
-
?
?
?
-
?
9600,8,n,1  
9600,8,n,1  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2: Disabled Login  
3: -MMUX  
4: Disabled Login  
? 19200  
?
9600,8,n,1  
5: Disabled Login  
?
?
?
?
?
Connected  
9600,8,n,1  
0
0
0
0
DP232 Cable Status: Ports 1-8  
Ports 9-16 Not Connected  
Ports 25-32 Not Connected  
Ports 17-24 Not Connected  
[232]  
ꢀ
Note: Not all links are displayed here. Entering the command with no additional  
parameters would show all 32 links.  
Column  
Link  
Description  
Displays the number of the link.  
Status  
Displays the link status as dataxfer (data is being transfered),  
idle, or disabled.  
Appl.  
Displays the application specified for the link (Alias, Login, or  
Destination).  
DTR RTS CTS DSR DCD  
Displays the status of the control signals. (+ means the signal  
is asserted and - means the signal is negated.)  
Format  
Displays the baud rate, number of data bits, parity (none, odd,  
or even), and number of stop bits specified for the link.  
Parity  
Frame  
Displays the number of parity errors.  
Displays the number of framing errors.  
Displays the number of overrun errors.  
Displays the number of underrun errors.  
Overun  
Underun  
8-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: syncflash  
syncflash  
ꢀ
Note: This command is only available when AI232 is in standalone mode.  
Description  
This command synchronizes the AI232 configuration with the configuration  
information stored on AI198. Enabling this feature ensures that if AI232 is placed in  
standalone mode, it will operate as it did in switch mode.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
syncflash { true | false }  
Parameters  
true  
Enables the update configuration functionality.  
false  
Disables the update configuration functionality.  
ꢀ
Note: When running in standalone mode, AI232 always writes to its file system when  
configuration changes are made. When running in switch mode, the running  
configuration on AI232 is always kept current with AI198's configuration.  
Examples  
This example displays the AI232 configuration being synchronized with the  
configuration information stored on AI198.  
[232]syncflash true  
[232]  
8-94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: tacacs info  
tacacs info  
Description  
This command identifies how the current shell session was authenticated. If the  
current session was authenticated by a TACACS+ server, it will display the IP address  
of the server. If a TACACS+ server could not be contacted and fallback is enabled, it  
will display Fallback to local. If TACACS+ authentication was disabled, it will display  
Local.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
tacacs info  
Examples  
This example displays the TACACS+ authentication information as 192.168.001.089.  
[232] tacacs info  
Current session authenticated by: 192.168.001.089  
[232]  
8-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: tacacs server  
tacacs server  
Description  
This command enables, disables, or removes the configuration for specified  
TACACS+ servers.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
tacacs server { server_range | * } { disable | enable | default }  
Parameters  
server_range  
Specifies a server number or range of server numbers. The server  
number represents a server’s priority level. AI232 attempts to  
contact all servers in the range starting with the lowest numbered  
ones. If the connection to server #1 fails, AI232 will attempt to  
contact server #2, and so on. Valid values are 1 to 9. Individual  
values are separated by commas (,) and hyphens (-). For  
example, 1,4-6 specifies servers 1, 4, 5, and 6.  
*
Specifies all TACACS+ servers.  
disable  
Disables the TACACS+ server or range of TACACS+ servers.  
enable  
Enables the TACACS+ server or range of TACACS+ servers.  
default  
Disables all servers in the range and sets all configuration values  
to their defaults.  
Command Defaults  
Disabled  
Examples  
This example displays the enabling of servers 1, 4 and 7.  
[232] tacacs server 1,4,7 enable  
[232]  
8-96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: tacacs server ip  
tacacs server ip  
Description  
This command configures an IP address for specified TACACS+ servers.  
ꢀ
Note: AI232 does not prevent users from configuring multiple server entries with the  
same IP address.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
tacacs server ip { server_range | * } { ip_address }  
Parameters  
server_range  
Specifies a server number or range of server numbers. Valid  
values are 1 to 9. Individual values are separated by commas (,)  
and hyphens (-). For example, 1,4-6 specifies servers 1, 4, 5, and  
6.  
*
Specifies all TACACS+ servers.  
ip_address  
Defines the server IP address.  
Command Defaults  
0.0.0.0  
Examples  
This example displays the configuration of IP address 12.56.120.4 for TACACS+  
servers 3.  
[232] tacacs server ip 3 12.56.120.4  
[232]  
8-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: tacacs server phase  
tacacs server phase  
Description  
This command configures the AAA phases that are allowed for specified TACACS+  
servers.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
tacacs server phase { server_range | * } { disable | enable }  
{ account | all | authen | author }  
Parameters  
server_range  
Specifies a server number or range of server numbers. Valid  
values are 1 to 9. Individual values are separated by commas (,)  
and hyphens (-). For example, 1,4-6 specifies servers 1, 4, 5, and  
6.  
*
Specifies all TACACS+ servers.  
disable  
Disables the specified AAA phases for the specified TACACS+  
servers.  
enable  
Enables the specified AAA phases for the specified TACACS+  
servers.  
account  
Enables or disables the accounting phase for the specified  
TACACS+ servers.  
all  
Enables or disables all AAA phases for the specified TACACS+  
servers.  
authen  
Enables or disables the authentication phase for the specified  
TACACS+ servers.  
author  
Enables or disables the authorization phase for the specified  
TACACS+ servers.  
Command Defaults  
All phases  
8-98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: tacacs server phase  
Examples  
This example displays the disabling of the accounting phase for servers 1 to 5 and 8.  
[232] tacacs server phase 1-5,8 disable account  
[232]  
8-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: tacacs server port  
tacacs server port  
Description  
This command configures the TCP port number for specified TACACS+ servers.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
tacacs server port { server_range | * } { port_number }  
Parameters  
server_range  
Specifies a server number or range of server numbers. Valid  
values are 1 to 9. Individual values are separated by commas (,)  
and hyphens (-). For example, 1,4-6 specifies servers 1, 4, 5, and  
6.  
*
Specifies all TACACS+ servers.  
port_number  
Defines the TCP port number for the TACACS+ servers. Valid  
values are 1 through 65535.  
Command Defaults  
TCP port 49  
Examples  
This example displays the configuration of TCP port number 32500 for TACACS+  
servers 7 to 9.  
[232] tacacs server port 7-9 32500  
[232]  
8-100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: tacacs server secret  
tacacs server secret  
Description  
This command configures the TACACS+ shared secret, which is similar to a  
password, for specified TACACS+ servers.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
tacacs server secret { server_range | * } { shared_secret }  
Parameters  
server_range  
Specifies a server number or range of server numbers. Valid  
values are 1 to 9. Individual values are separated by commas (,)  
and hyphens (-). For example, 1,4-6specifies servers 1, 4, 5, and  
6.  
*
Specifies all TACACS+ servers.  
shared_secret  
Defines the TACACS+ shared secret for the server or server  
range. The maximum length of the shared secret is 24  
characters.  
Command Defaults  
No secret configured  
Examples  
This example displays the configuration of shared secret newguy for TACACS+ server  
8.  
[232] tacacs server secret 8 newguy  
[232]  
8-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: tacacs server summary  
tacacs server summary  
Description  
This command displays a summary of TACACS+ server configuration settings for  
specified servers.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
tacacs server summary [ server_range | * ]  
Parameters  
server_range  
Specifies a server number or range of server numbers. Valid  
values are 1 to 9. Individual values are separated by commas (,)  
and hyphens (-). For example, 1,4-6 specifies servers 1, 4, 5, and  
6.  
*
Specifies all TACACS+ servers.  
Examples  
This example displays all configured TACACS+ servers and server settings.  
[232] tacacs server summary  
Server IP Address  
Port Secret  
------ --------------- ----- ------------------------ ---------------------  
Phases  
+ 1  
- 2  
- 3  
+ 4  
- 5  
- 6  
+ 7  
- 8  
- 9  
012.056.120.004  
012.056.120.004  
012.056.120.004  
012.012.012.012  
012.012.012.012  
012.012.012.012  
49  
49  
49  
49  
49  
49  
Authen Author  
Authen Author  
Authen Author  
Authen Author  
Authen Author  
Authen Author Account  
Authen Author Account  
000.000.000.000 32500  
000.000.000.000 32500  
000.000.000.000 32500  
newguy Authen Author  
Authen Author Account  
[232]  
Display Item Description  
Server  
Displays the server numbers. The +/- signs indicate if the  
associated servers are enabled (+) or disabled (-).  
IP Address  
Displays the configured TACACS+ IP addresses for the specified  
TACACS+ servers.  
8-102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: tacacs server summary  
Display Item Description  
Port  
Displays the configured TACACS+ port numbers for the specified  
TACACS+ servers.  
Secret  
Phases  
Displays the TACACS+ shared secrets (passwords) for specified  
TACACS+ servers.  
Displays the AAA phases that are allowed for specified TACACS+  
servers.  
8-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: tacacs sholog  
tacacs sholog  
Description  
This command displays the contents of the TACACS+ debug log file. The TACACS+  
debug log file records all connection attempts to TACACS+ servers. The following  
information is displayed for each connection attempt:  
z
z
z
z
A record of the timestamp  
The IP address of TACACS+ server  
The AAA phase  
The success or failure status associated with each connection.  
ꢀ
Note: The TACACS+ debug log file is only populated when TACACS+ debugging is  
enabled using command debug tacacs on.  
Format  
tacacs sholog [ -p ]  
Parameters  
-p  
Displays the contents of the debug log file one page at a time.  
Examples  
This example displays a TACACS+ debug log file.  
[232] tacacs sholog  
[02:26:32 030406] 192.168.001.074 AUTHEN FAIL  
[02:26:32 030406] 192.168.001.089 AUTHEN SUCCESS  
[02:26:32 030406] 192.168.001.074 AUTHOR FAIL  
[02:26:32 030406] 192.168.001.089 AUTHOR SUCCESS  
8-104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: tacacs stats  
tacacs stats  
Description  
This command displays or clears TACACS+ specific counters and statistics.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
tacacs stats [ clear ]  
Parameters  
clear  
Clears all TACACS+ specific counters and statistics.  
Examples  
This example displays all TACACS+ specific counters and statistics.  
TACACS+ Statistics  
-------------------------  
Connect Attempts:  
Connect Failures:  
0
0
Wrong Header Type:  
0
0
0
0
Wrong Header Sequence Number:  
Wrong Header Session ID:  
Wrong Body Length:  
Write Errors:  
Read Errors:  
0
0
0
0
Short Header Received:  
Short Body Received:  
Timed-out waiting for response: 0  
[232]  
Display Item  
Description  
Connect Attempts  
Connect Failures  
Wrong Header Type  
Displays the number of attempts that were made to connect to  
the TACACS+ server.  
Displays the number of failed connection attempts that were  
made to the TACACS+ server.  
Displays the number of packets received from the TACACS+  
server that had an invalid type.  
8-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: tacacs stats  
Display Item  
Description  
Wrong Header  
Sequence Number  
Displays the number of packets received from the TACACS+  
server that had a sequence number that was out of order.  
Wrong Header  
Session ID  
Displays the number of packets received from the TACACS+  
server that had an invalid session ID.  
Wrong Body Length  
Displays the number of packets received from the TACACS+  
server that had a body length attribute that did not match the  
actual length of body received.  
Write Errors  
Read Errors  
Displays the number of errors that occurred when AI232  
attempted to send a packet to the TACACS+ server.  
Displays the number of errors that occurred when AI232  
attempted to read a packet from the TACACS+ server.  
Short Header  
Received  
Displays the number of incomplete headers that were received  
when AI232 attempted to read a packet from the TACACS+  
server.  
Short Body  
Received  
Displays the number of packets with incomplete bodies that  
were received when AI232 attempted to read them from the  
TACACS+ server.  
Timed-out waiting  
for response  
Displays the number of times AI232 timed out while waiting for  
a response from the TACACS+ server. For information about  
configuring the time out value, refer to command aaa timeout  
on page 8-19.  
8-106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: tail  
tail  
Description  
This command displays the last few lines of a file.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
tail [ -n lines ] file_name ...  
ꢀ
Note: More than one file name can be specified in this command.  
Parameters  
-n  
Specifies that a line number value will be entered.  
lines  
Defines the number of lines to display. The default is 20.  
file_name  
Defines the name of the file to display.  
Examples  
This example displays the last 20 lines of file log.txt.  
[232]tail -n 20 log.txt  
Configuration has changed  
13:39:08 050304 Sev=F Msg:  
Unknown WINSLC command TRACE  
14:07:52 050304 Sev=F Msg:  
Valid commands are:  
ARP  
IP  
ROUTER  
TELNET  
BREAK  
LINK  
SHOW  
CRESET  
PANIC  
STAEIA  
XON-INTERVAL  
DIAG-TCONN  
PING  
STASLC  
HELP  
PVCLIST  
TCPOUTCONN  
UPDATE  
14:21:01 050304 Sev=F Msg:  
Valid commands are:  
ARP  
IP  
BREAK  
LINK  
SHOW  
CRESET  
PANIC  
DIAG-TCONN  
PING  
STASLC  
HELP  
PVCLIST  
TCPOUTCONN  
ROUTER  
TELNET  
STAEIA  
XON-INTERVAL  
UPDATE  
14:31:19 050304 Sev=F Msg:  
The WINSLC command 'TELNET 75' must be executed from  
the CLC's menu 4.18 for this SLC.  
[232]  
8-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: tcpoutconn  
tcpoutconn  
Description  
This command controls how long outgoing TCP connections wait for a connection to  
be established before failing.  
Command Type  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
tcpoutconn [ timeout ]  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport tcpoutconn [ timeout ]  
Parameters  
timeout  
Defines the length of the timeout. The range is 2 to 360 seconds. The  
default is 75.  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI232.  
ꢀ
Note: In standalone mode, resetting AI232 resets the timeout to the default of 75.  
Examples  
This example displays the configuration of the TCP outgoing connection timer to 30  
seconds.  
[232]tcpoutconn 30  
TCP Outgoing Connection Timer Value: 30  
[232]  
8-108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: telnet  
telnet  
Description  
This command changes the port number used to receive incoming telnet connections  
from default port 23.  
Important: This command must be executed from CLC Menu 4.18 in the AI198  
menu system. When AI232 is booted, Menu 4.18 entries are no longer  
visible. To see the current telnet port number after AI232 is booted, use  
the winslctelnetcommand.  
Command Type  
winslc  
Formats  
telnet port_number  
Parameters  
port_number  
Defines the port number used to receive incoming telnet  
connections. Valid values are from 1 to 65534. The default is 23.  
Examples  
This example changes the telnet port to port 68.  
>1 telnet 68  
Menu 4.18 pg 1  
01 telnet 68  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
16 Previous page [,page]  
17 Next page  
18 Insert line  
19 Delete line  
20 Retain these changes for saving  
21 Exit this menu with no changes  
Enter item number and optional ",value" then push <CR> key  
>
8-109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: tftp  
tftp  
ꢀ
Note: This command is only available when AI232 is in standalone mode.  
Description  
This command downloads a file from the Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server  
to AI232 or uploads a file to the TFTP server from AI232.  
The following rules apply when uploading or downloading a file:  
z
z
File names must contain an extension of .ini, .img, .zmg, .cnf, or .txt.  
Configuration files can be downloaded directly to file primary.cnf or to another .cnf  
file.  
z
z
z
The only .txt file allowed is banner.txt and the only .ini file allowed is boot.ini.  
AI232 must be updated in order to run a downloaded image file.  
Any .img filename is acceptable except boot.img, which is reserved, and  
primary_devel.img, which is the primary image.  
z
z
All .zmg files must be written to a destination file with a .img extension. If no  
destination file name is given, the name will default to the source file name with a  
.img extension.  
The source and destination file names must have the same extension (excluding  
.zmg files, which use a .img extension).  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
tftp { get | put } [ address ] [ source_filename ] [ dest_filename ]  
Parameters  
get  
Downloads a file from the TFTP server.  
put  
Uploads a file to the TFTP server.  
address  
Defines the IP address of the TFTP server to which the file  
download or upload will occur.  
source_filename  
Defines the file to download from or upload to the TFTP server.  
ꢀ
Note: The source file name cannot contain spaces or special  
characters.  
8-110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: tftp  
dest_filename  
Defines the name of the source file after it has been  
downloaded from or uploaded to the server. If no destination  
file name is specified, the file will have the same name as the  
source file.  
ꢀ
Note: The destination file name cannot contain spaces or  
special characters.  
Examples  
This example displays the upload of file primary.cnf to file secondary.cnf on TFTP  
server 10.34.6.13.  
[232] tftp put 10.34.6.13 primary.cnf secondary.cnf  
File Uploaded successfully.  
[232]  
This example displays the download of file secondary.cnf to file primary.cnf from TFTP  
server 10.34.6.13.  
[232] tftp get 10.34.6.13 secondary.cnf primary.cnf  
Attempting to Download the file secondary.cnf ...  
File Downloaded successfully.  
[232]  
8-111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: tftpboot  
tftpboot  
Description  
This command displays the BOOTP/TFTP status or aborts attempts to contact the  
BOOTP server. The AI232 card attempts to contact a BOOTP server if certain  
conditions are met. These conditions are:  
z
The card is in standalone mode.  
AND  
z
The card does not have an IP address set or no BOOT.INI file exists.  
Attempts to contact the BOOTP server continue until a valid reply is received or until  
the IP address gets set by the user in another manner, such as with an “ip init” shell  
command.  
ꢀ
Note: If the conditions are initially met, then the card will not attempt to contact the  
BOOTP server.  
When AI232 receives the necessary information from the BOOTP server, it attempts  
to retrieve a configuration file from the TFTP server. The TFTP server information is  
contained in the response from the BOOTP server.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
tftpboot  
Examples  
This example displays the result of a card booting without a BOOTP/TFTP session.  
[232]tftpboot  
Usage: tftpboot [abort]  
Displays BOOTP/TFTP status or aborts retry attempts.  
BOOTP/TFTP did not run this session.  
[232]  
8-112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: tftpboot  
This example displays the result of a card booting when no BOOTP or TFTP server is  
on the net.  
[232] tftpboot  
Usage: tftpboot [abort]  
Displays BOOTP/TFTP status or aborts retry attempts.  
Waiting for a response from the BOOTP server.  
[232] tftpboot abort  
BOOTP/TFTP retry attempts will be aborted.  
[232]  
This example displays the result of a boot when the BOOTP server is on the net but  
the TFTP server is not available:  
[232] tftpboot  
Usage: tftpboot [abort]  
Displays BOOTP/TFTP status or aborts retry attempts.  
Waiting for a response from the TFTP server.  
BOOTP Response:  
IP Address: 10.48.60.11  
TFTP Server: 10.48.60.1  
TFTP File: 296v950b002.cnf  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0  
Router: 10.48.0.1  
[232]  
This example displays the result of a reboot with a successful BOOTP/TFTP session:  
[232]tftpboot  
Usage: tftpboot [abort]  
Displays BOOTP/TFTP status or aborts retry attempts.  
BOOTP/TFTP is finished.  
[232]  
8-113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: timezone  
timezone  
ꢀ
Note: This command is only available when AI232 is in standalone mode.  
Description  
This command displays or changes the time zone or adjusts the time to reflect  
daylight savings.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
timezone [ -dston | -dstoff ] [ { + | - } hh:mm ]  
Parameters  
-dston  
Enables daylight savings time for AI232.  
-dstoff  
Disables daylight savings time for AI232.  
hh  
Defines the number of hours from UTC (Universal Coordinated Time or  
Greenwich Mean Time).  
mm  
Defines the number of minutes from UTC (Universal Coordinated Time  
or Greenwich Mean Time).  
+
Specifies that the value is east of UTC.  
-
Specifies that the value is west of UTC.  
ꢀ
Note: For +/-, enter the direction (+ = east) (- = west) of Universal Coordinated Time  
(UTC) or Greenwich Mean Time.  
The time entered here is the number of hours from UTC. For example, if the  
desired location is in the Eastern Standard Time (EST) zone, enter -05:00 in  
this field. This indicates a time 5 hours behind UTC.  
Examples  
This example displays the current daylight savings time setting.  
[232]timezone  
Daylight saving is disabled on this system  
Current time zone: +00:00  
[232]  
8-114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: timezone  
This example displays the enabling of daylight savings time and the setting of the  
timezone to -5:00.  
[232]timezone -dston  
Daylight saving is enabled on this system  
Current time zone: +00:00  
[232]timezone -05:00  
Daylight saving is enabled on this system  
Current time zone: -05:00  
[232]  
8-115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: type  
type  
Description  
This command displays the text of any file other than a code image or configuration  
file.  
ꢀ
Note: This command has the same functionality as command cat.  
Command Types  
shell  
Formats  
type [ -p ] filename  
Parameters  
-p  
Displays text from the file one page at a time.  
filename  
Defines the file for which you want to view the contents.  
Examples  
This example displays the first page of contents for file log.txt.  
[232]type -p log.txt  
14:48:28 042904 Sev=F Msg:  
User 'pubs' has deleted the log file.  
16:30:58 042904 Sev=0 Msg:  
Configuration has changed  
16:30:58 042904 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#2088 has exited the shell.  
16:31:00 042904 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#2088 has logged out of the Destination Menu.  
09:34:57 043004 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1212 has logged into the Destination Menu.  
09:34:59 043004 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1212 has entered the shell.  
13:12:38 043004 Sev=0 Msg:  
Configuration has changed  
13:12:38 043004 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1212 has exited the shell.  
13:31:14 043004 Sev=F Msg:  
User pubs from 10.40.5.20#1212 has entered the shell.  
Press Space for more or q to quit:  
8-116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: update  
update  
Description  
This command displays information about the image and configuration files. When  
entered with arguments, this command updates AI232 software. Update the software  
by copying a new image or configuration file to a destination file.  
Command Types  
shell and winslc  
Formats  
For the shell command:  
update src_file dest_file  
For the winslc command:  
winslc baseport update src_file dest_file  
Parameters  
src_file  
Defines the source file to copy.  
dest_file  
Defines the file where the source file is to be stored.  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI232.  
ꢀ
Note: The src_fileand the dest_filemust both have a file extension of either .cnf  
or .img.  
Examples  
This example displays the update of source image file 232.imgto destination image file  
boot.img.  
[232]update 232.img boot.img  
[232]  
8-117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: uptime  
uptime  
Description  
This command displays the current time and the amount of time AI232 has been  
running since it was last booted.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
uptime  
Examples  
This example displays the current time and the amount of time AI232 has been  
running since it was last booted.  
[232]uptime  
4:22pm up 0 days, 0:07:44  
(uptime rolls over every 497 days, 2:27:52)  
[232]  
8-118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: useradd  
useradd  
Description  
This command adds a username and password. When the user first logs into AI232,  
the login name and password are both aiby default. Five grace logins are available  
before a username and password must be configured. A total of ten users can be  
added to the database.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
useradd [ -profile_name ] [ username ]  
Parameters  
profile_name  
Assigns a permission to a username. Table 8-3 describes the  
permissions. The default permission is supervisor.  
username  
Defines the login name for a user (up to 8 characters). After  
entering a username, a prompt appears that asks for a password  
(up to 10 characters).  
Table 8-3 Description of Permissions  
profile_name Permission  
supervisor  
Specifies a user who can execute all commands on the system. At  
least one supervisor permission must be configured. The system  
will not allow the deletion of the only supervisor user. The default  
permission is supervisor.  
mgmt  
Specifies a user who can execute all commands except for  
useradd.  
8-119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: useradd  
Table 8-3 Description of Permissions (Continued)  
profile_name Permission  
status  
Specifies a user who can only execute the following commands:  
z creset  
z debug  
z diag-conn  
z diag-info  
z diag-eth  
z diag-tconn  
z help  
z ip  
z menu  
z ping  
z pvclist  
z show  
z staeia  
z staslc  
dest  
Specifies a user who can login into AI232 and access the  
destination menu. The user cannot connect to destination aito  
retrieve status or to change the configuration.  
connect  
Specifies a user who is automatically connected to a specific  
destination at login. The destination is specified when the  
permission is assigned.  
Examples  
This example displays the addition of user brianwith profile mgmtto the user database.  
The system prompts the user for the password after the username and profile are  
entered.  
[232]useradd -mgmt brian  
Adding user of type 'mgmt'  
Please enter a password.  
Passwords are truncated at 10 characters.  
Please retype the password.  
User "brian" added successfully.  
[232]  
8-120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: userdel  
userdel  
Description  
This command deletes a username and password from the database.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
userdel  
Examples  
This example displays the deletion of user brian from the database. After the  
command is initially entered, prompts appear that tell the user what information needs  
to be entered.  
[232] userdel  
Please enter the login name of the user to DELETE.  
newguy  
Delete user "newguy"? (y/n) y  
User "newguy" deleted successfully.  
[232]  
8-121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: users  
users  
Description  
This command displays currently configured AI232 users with the associated profile  
names and destinations.  
Command Types  
shell  
Formats  
user  
Examples  
This example displays all currently configured AI232 users with associated profile  
names and destinations. In this case, pubs is the only configured user.  
[232] users  
User Name  
-----------------------------------------------  
Profile Name  
Destination  
"pubs"  
[232]  
supervisor  
8-122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: who  
who  
Description  
This command displays the users currently logged into AI232. It displays the user  
name, time of login, user ID, the source of the connection, and command currently  
being used by each user. The destination is shown only if the user has connected to  
an alias with the destination menu.  
Important: Do not use the ID displayed with this command to break a connection.  
Command Type  
shell  
Formats  
who  
Examples  
This example displays all the users currently logged in to the AI232. In this case, pubs  
is the only logged in user.  
[232] who  
User  
Login Time  
------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
ID From  
Command (-> Destination)  
"pubs"  
[232]  
Jul 28 02:42  
149 10.40.5.12#1241  
who  
8-123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Commands: xon-interval  
xon-interval  
Description  
This command adjusts the amount of time between consecutive Xons. If inbound flow  
control is enabled on an asynchronous link, AI232 transmits Xons at regular intervals.  
Command Type  
winslc  
Formats  
winslc baseport xon-interval link seconds  
Parameters  
baseport  
Defines the baseport number for AI232.  
link  
Defines the link number to adjust the XON interval. Valid values are 1 to  
32.  
seconds  
Defines the number of seconds the link waits between sending  
consecutive XONs. The default interval is 15 seconds. The valid range  
is 1 to 120 seconds.  
Examples  
This example displays the configuration of the XON transmit interval to 45 seconds on  
link 3.  
NODE-XXX AISwitch Shell Connection 14  
>winslc 16 xon-interval 3 45  
NODE-XXX AISwitch Shell Connection 14  
8-124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A
AI232 Crash Codes  
This appendix provides information about AI232 crash codes.  
Guide to this Appendix  
Crash Codes  
Kentrox Technical Support  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Crash Codes: Crash Codes  
Crash Codes  
Crash codes report to the log port when a card crashes and you receive an AIswitch  
fault message. This message indicates that the system has detected a serious  
hardware or software fault.  
Common Crash Codes  
These codes are common to all software (not just AI products). The first column of  
Table A-1 displays the hexadecimal code for the error message. The second column  
displays the decimal value for the same message. The third column provides a  
description of the error message. Contact AI Technical Support to report any of the  
following crash codes.  
Table A-1 Common Crash Codes  
Error Code  
Hexadecimal Decimal  
Error Code  
Description  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
0006  
0007  
0008  
0009  
09xx  
1
Specifies a bus error.  
2
Specifies an address error.  
Specifies an illegal instruction.  
Specifies a zero divide error.  
Specifies a check instruction trap.  
Specifies a TRAPV error.  
3
4
5
6
7
Specifies a privilege error.  
Specifies a trace trap.  
8
9
Specifies an unused exception vector.  
>264  
Specifies an illegal vector. xx is the vector number  
(non-zero) used in place of the codes above to  
ensure that the exact vector number is determined  
if an exception occurs.  
A-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Crash Codes: Crash Codes  
AI232 Crash Codes  
Table A-2 displays crash codes that are specific to AI232. Contact AI Technical  
Support to report any of the following crash codes.  
Table A-2 AI232 Crash Codes  
Error Code  
Hexadecimal Decimal  
Error Code  
Description  
0020  
0021  
0022  
0023  
0024  
0025  
0026  
0027  
0028  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
Specifies a failure to free resource (streams).  
Specifies a failure to free memory (system).  
Specifies a failure of resource allocation (streams).  
Specifies a failure of memory allocation.  
Specifies a checksum error.  
Specifies that a panic message has been printed.  
Specifies an attempt to boot while up.  
This code is not used.  
Specifies that AI232 has been halted by Central  
Switch command. This code is seen when you enter  
command stpslcfor a card.  
0030  
0031  
0032  
0033  
0034  
0035  
0036  
0037  
0038  
0039  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
Specifies a crash in the shell.  
Specifies a crash in transport layer multiplexing.  
Specifies a crash in association daemon.  
Specifies a crash in bootp.  
Specifies a crash in X.25.  
Specifies a crash in an asynchronous driver.  
Specifies a crash in the PVC daemon.  
Specifies a crash in the config daemon.  
Specifies a generic stream error.  
Specifies a crash in the AEP or AEPN protocol  
processing option.  
003A  
58  
Specifies a crash in the pktmod or TL1mod protocol  
processing option.  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Crash Codes: Crash Codes  
Table A-2 AI232 Crash Codes (Continued)  
Error Code  
Hexadecimal Decimal  
Error Code  
Description  
00AA  
00AC  
00AD  
170  
172  
173  
Specifies a serious memory error (unable to allocate  
system memory).  
Specifies that a serial communication controller is  
not responding.  
Specifies a software download. This is normal to  
see when doing a software update to AI232.  
System Failure Crash Reports  
Crash codes report to the log port when a card crashes and you receive an AIswitch  
fault message. This message indicates that the system has detected a serious  
hardware or software fault.  
A message similar to the following appears:  
SLC has CRASHED - registers to follow:  
Crash Code= 000000ad  
PC= 00000000  
SP= 00000000  
IMMR= 00000000  
MSR= 00000000  
GPR00= 00000000  
GPR03= 00000000  
GPR06= 00000000  
GPR09= 00000000  
GPR12= 00000000  
GPR15= 00000000  
GPR18= 00000000  
GPR21= 00000000  
GPR24= 00000000  
GPR27= 00000000  
GPR30= 00000000  
CR= 00000000  
GPR01= 00000000  
GPR04= 00000000  
GPR07= 00000000  
GPR10= 00000000  
GPR13= 00000000  
GPR16= 00000000  
GPR19= 00000000  
GPR22= 00000000  
GPR25= 00000000  
GPR28= 00000000  
GPR31= 00000000  
SSR0= 00000000  
GRP02= 00000000  
GRP05= 00000000  
GRP08= 00000000  
GRP11= 00000000  
GRP14= 00000000  
GRP17= 00000000  
GRP20= 00000000  
GRP23= 00000000  
GRP26= 00000000  
GRP29= 00000000  
SSR1= 00000000  
LR= 00000000  
PVR= 00500000  
XER= 00000000  
PSOS1=00000000  
CTR= 00000000  
PSOS2=00000000  
PSOS3= 00000000  
A-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Crash Codes: Kentrox Technical Support  
Kentrox Technical Support  
Some alarm conditions and crash codes reveal serious problems for which you  
should contact Kentrox Technical Support. If one of these alarm conditions or crashes  
should occur, record relevant information associated with the problem and contact  
Kentrox Technical Support.  
Phone:  
Kentrox Technical Support (866) 480-3571  
Kentrox Operator (toll-  
free)  
(800) 247-9482  
Kentrox Operator  
(international)  
(614) 798-2000  
Email:  
Kentrox Technical  
Support  
[email protected]  
When you send email to Kentrox, be sure to include your name, company name, and  
telephone number.  
A-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
AI232 Crash Codes: Kentrox Technical Support  
A-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B
Standalone Mode and Switch Mode  
This appendix provides information about standalone and switch mode for AI232.  
Guide to this Appendix  
Standalone Mode  
Switch Mode  
B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Standalone Mode and Switch Mode: Standalone Mode  
Standalone Mode  
Standalone mode refers to the mode where AI232 stores its configuration locally (to  
flash) or on a TFTP server. The CLC might be used as the TFTP server in some  
cases. This lets the card operate as a self-contained unit. When operating in  
standalone mode, AI232 has a local menu system that is used instead of the AI198  
menu system for tasks such as alias and IP configuration. AI232 operates in  
standalone mode when it is installed in the AI110 chassis.  
The following characteristics apply when AI232 is operating in standalone mode:  
z
z
The front panel Ethernet port is the default (rather than the IRB).  
AI232 cards are not hot-swappable—the card configuration must be set up  
manually.  
z
z
AI232 has a unique system OID.  
The AI232 local menu system has slightly different options than when the card is  
running in switch mode.  
Downloading Software for a Standalone AI232  
To download software for AI232 in standalone mode:  
1. Open a command prompt window.  
2. At the command prompt, start the FTP utility:  
ftp  
3. At the FTP prompt, open AI232:  
open ip_address  
ip_address  
Specifies the AI232 IP address.  
The FTP utility prompts you for a user name and password.  
4. Put the FTP utility in binary mode:  
binary  
5. Transfer the software image to AI232:  
put filepath/imagename.img  
filepath  
Defines the path to the software image file.  
imagename  
Defines the software image file name.  
ꢀ
Note: Wait for a completion message after entering this command.  
B-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Standalone Mode and Switch Mode: Standalone Mode  
6. Exit the FTP utility.  
7. Login to the shell with a serial or Telnet connection.  
8. Update the existing boot program image with the new software image file:  
update imagename.img boot.img  
imagename  
Defines the software image file name.  
9. When the update is complete, reboot AI232.  
Configuring BOOTP/TFTP  
The AI232 configuration can be automatically downloaded from a TFTP server when  
the card is in standalone mode and has BOOTP information stored in AI198 Menu 10.  
For more information about BOOTP configuration, refer to “Configuring the BOOTP  
Table” in the AI198 Common Logic Controller System Manager/User’s Manual.  
When AI232 starts, it determines if the following conditions are met before using  
BOOTP to find IP address information:  
z
z
AI232 is in standalone mode  
The IP address is not set.  
If both of these conditions are met, AI232 attempts to contact a BOOTP server until it  
obtains valid IP address information or the IP address is set by a user with the  
ip initshell command. When an IP address has been obtained either by BOOTP or  
through the ip init command, AI232 will resume its boot process.  
The following events occur when AI232 attempts to download a configuration file from  
the TFTP server:  
z
Once the IP address information has been correctly configured from the BOOTP  
reply, AI232 will attempt to contact a TFTP server only if the TFTP server IP  
address and configuration filename were received by the BOOTP reply.  
z
z
AI232 will try to download the configuration file from the TFTP server once every  
60 seconds for a maximum of 10 retries.  
If no valid configuration file is downloaded from the TFTP server after 10 retries,  
AI232 will remove the previously configured IP address information from the  
BOOTP server and completely restart the BOOTP process.  
z
z
If at any time the local configuration file stored on flash is changed by a user,  
AI232 will stop attempting to contact the TFTP server.  
If a valid configuration is successfully downloaded from the TFTP server, AI232  
will update the current configuration with the downloaded file.  
B-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Standalone Mode and Switch Mode: Switch Mode  
Switch Mode  
Switch mode refers to the mode where AI232 is managed by the CLC. When AI232 is  
in switch mode, the AI198 menu system must be used to configure IP addresses,  
aliases, IP static routes, and SNMP traps. AI232 must be located in the AI130 or  
AI180 chassis to operate in switch mode.  
The following characteristics apply when AI232 is operating in switch mode:  
z
AI232 gets its configuration from the CLC at boot time (instead of locally or by  
TFTP).  
z
z
z
The CLC is used to route calls and maintain alias configuration information.  
The IRB is the default port (rather than the front panel Ethernet port).  
AI232 cards are hot-swappable—the card configuration does not have to be set  
up manually.  
ꢀ
Note: Switch mode may also be referred to as CLC mode.  
Downloading Software for AI232 in Switch Mode  
To download software for AI232 when it is in switch mode:  
1. Open a command prompt window.  
2. At the command prompt, start the FTP utility:  
ftp  
3. At the FTP prompt, open AI198:  
open ip_address  
ip_address  
Specifies the AI198 IP address.  
The FTP utility prompts you for a user name and password.  
4. Put the FTP utility in binary mode:  
binary  
5. Transfer the software image to AI198:  
put filepath/imagename.img  
filepath  
Defines the path to the software image file.  
imagename  
Defines the software image file name.  
ꢀ
Note: Wait for a completion message after entering this command.  
B-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Standalone Mode and Switch Mode: Switch Mode  
6. Exit the FTP utility.  
7. Log in to AI198.  
8. At the command prompt, update AI232 with the new software image:  
winslc baseport update  
baseport  
Defines the baseport of AI232.  
ꢀ
Note: You can watch the download process by entering CTRL+L.  
9. Wait for the completion message.  
B-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Standalone Mode and Switch Mode: Switch Mode  
B-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C
Commands for AI232 TACACS+  
Server Enhancements  
This appendix provides a list of commands that users need when configuring a TACACS+ server  
to utilize AI232’s authorization enhancements.  
Guide to this Appendix  
AI232 Commands  
AI232 Menu Aliases  
FTP Sessions  
C-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Commands for AI232 TACACS+ Server Enhancements: AI232 Commands  
AI232 Commands  
Important: To authorize a command with no additional arguments, remember to  
enter permit ^$in the argument list.  
The following AI232 commands can be included in an authorization set on the  
TACACS+ server:  
2401  
pvclist  
queue  
ip  
aaa  
ai  
alarm  
arp  
link  
log  
break  
cat  
logout  
ls  
clear  
crash  
crc  
reset  
rm  
selcnf  
sholog  
show  
creset  
date  
debug  
del  
snmp  
id  
delete  
diag-conn  
diag-eth  
diag-info  
diag-line  
diag-tconn  
dir  
sonic  
staeia  
standalone  
staslc  
syncflash  
tacacs  
tail  
exit  
task  
head  
tcpoutconn  
tftp  
help  
memory  
memtrack  
menu  
tftpboot  
timezone  
type  
modmux  
more  
update  
uptime  
useradd  
userdel  
users  
who  
passwd  
ping  
pppstatus  
profile  
The following keyword lets users access destinations:  
dest  
Provides authorization at the destination menu. Individual destination  
names can be used as arguments. For example, {permit AI, permit  
somedestination, permit EXIT}.  
C-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Commands for AI232 TACACS+ Server Enhancements: AI232 Menu Aliases  
AI232 Menu Aliases  
The following AI232 menu aliases can be included in an authorization set on the  
TACACS+ server. Authorization occurs when level 1 menu items are traversed:  
menu  
Provides access to the menu.  
menu_link  
Provides read access to the link menu.  
menu_link write  
Provides write access to the link menu.  
menu_alias  
Provides read access to the alias menu.  
menu_alias write  
Provides write access to the alias menu.  
menu_system  
Provides read access to the system menu.  
menu_system write  
Provides write access to the system menu.  
menu_route  
Provides read access to the static route menu.  
menu_route write  
Provides write access to the static route menu.  
ꢀ
Note: Keyword writeis treated as an argument.  
C-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AI232 Version 9.6x User’s Guide  
Commands for AI232 TACACS+ Server Enhancements: FTP Sessions  
FTP Sessions  
The following AI232 keywords apply to FTP access:  
ftplogin  
Provides FTP read access.  
ftpwrite  
Provides FTP write access.  
C-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Acronyms and Abbreviations  
Table 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations  
Acronym Meaning  
ABR  
ACK  
ACTA  
AEP  
Area Border Router  
Acknowledgement (positive)  
Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments  
Applied Innovation Encapsulation Protocol  
Applied Innovation Encapsulated Protocol with the Network option  
Applied Innovation Inc.  
AEPN  
AI  
ALS  
Address Lookup Server  
AMI  
Alternate Mask Inversion  
ARP  
AS  
Address Resolution Protocol  
Autonomous System  
ASBDR  
ASBR  
ASE  
Autonomous System Boundary Router  
Autonomous System Boundary Router  
Autonomous System External  
Autonomous System External  
Application Service Provider  
Bistate Alarm Module  
ASEX  
ASP  
BAM  
BCP  
BER  
BERT  
BGMP  
Bridging Control Protocol  
Bit Error Rate  
Bit Error Rate Test  
Border Gateway Multicast Protocol  
Acronyms-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Acronyms and Abbreviations  
Table 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations (Continued)  
Acronym Meaning  
BGP  
Border Gateway Protocol  
BOC  
BPDU  
BRI  
Bell Operating Company  
Bridge Protocol Data Unit  
Basic Rate Interface  
C
Common  
CAAML  
CALLA  
CALLC  
CALLR  
CCI  
Centralized Autonomous AI Message Logging  
Call Accepted Packet  
Call Connected Packet  
Call Request Packet  
Command and Control Interface  
Consultative Committee on International Telegraphy and Telephony  
Carrier Detect  
CCITT  
CD  
CEV  
Controlled Environment Vault  
Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol  
Common Logic Controller  
CHAP  
CLC  
CLEC  
CLEI  
CLI  
Competitive Local Exchange Carrier  
Common Language Equipment Identifier  
Command Line Interface  
CLNP  
CLRC  
CLRI  
CLRR  
CPE  
Connectionless Network Protocol  
Clear Confirmation Packet  
Clear Indication Packet  
Clear Request Packet  
Customer Premises Equipment  
Central Processing Unit  
CPU  
CRC  
Cyclic Redundancy Check  
Acronyms-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Acronyms and Abbreviations  
Table 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations (Continued)  
Acronym Meaning  
CRT  
CSU  
CTS  
CUD  
DAD  
DCD  
DCE  
DCN  
DD  
Cathode Ray Tube  
Channel Service Unit  
Clear to Send  
Call User Data  
Data Acquisition Device  
Data Carrier Detect  
Data Circuit Terminating Equipment or Data Communication Equipment  
Data Communications Network  
Database Description  
DHCP  
DLC  
DLCI  
DNS  
DSR  
DSU  
DSX  
DTE  
DTR  
DVMRP  
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  
Data Link Control  
Data Link Connection Identifier (Information)  
Domain Name Service  
Data Set Ready  
Digital Service Unit  
Digital System Cross-Connect  
Data Terminal Equipment  
Data Terminal Ready  
Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol  
EEPROM Electronically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory  
EGP  
EIA  
External Gateway Protocol  
Electronic Industries Association  
Element Manager  
EM  
EMI  
Electro Magnetic Interference  
Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory  
EPROM  
Acronyms-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Acronyms and Abbreviations  
Table 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations (Continued)  
Acronym Meaning  
ES  
End System  
ESD  
ES-IS  
EST  
FCC  
FDM  
FDX  
FGND  
FIC  
Electrostatic Discharge  
End System to Intermediate System  
Eastern Standard Time  
Federal Communications Commission  
Frequency Division Multiplexing  
Full Duplex  
Frame Ground  
Faculty Interface Code  
FOC  
FTAM  
FTP  
Fiber Optics Communications  
File Transfer, Access, and Management  
File Transfer Protocol  
GMT  
GRE  
GUI  
Greenwich Mean Time  
Generic Routing Encapsulation  
Graphical User Interface  
High Level Data Link Control  
Input/Output  
HDLC  
I/O  
ICALL  
ICMP  
ID  
Incoming Call Packet  
Internet Control Message Protocol  
Identification  
IEEE  
IGMP  
IGP  
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers  
Internet Group Multicast Protocol  
Interior Gateway Protocol  
IP Control Protocol  
IPCP  
IPX  
Internetwork Packet Exchange  
Acronyms-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Acronyms and Abbreviations  
Table 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations (Continued)  
Acronym Meaning  
IRB  
Inter-repeater Bus  
Intermediate System  
IS  
ISDN  
IS-IS  
ISO  
Integrated Services Digital Network  
Intermediate System to Intermediate System  
International Standards Organization  
Internet Service Provider  
International Telecommunication Union  
IP Protocol over X.25 Encapsulation  
Java Runtime Environment  
Local Area Network  
ISP  
ITU  
IXE  
JRE  
LAN  
LAPB  
LBO  
LCN  
LCP  
LED  
LLC  
LSA  
LSR  
LSU  
MAC  
MAN  
MBR  
MCI  
MD  
Link Access Protocol - Balanced  
Line Build Out  
Logical Channel Number  
Link Control Protocol  
Light Emitting Diode  
Logical Link Control  
Link State Advertisement  
Link State Request  
Link State Update  
Media Access Control  
Metropolitan Area Network  
Master Boot Record  
Master Communications Interface  
Mediation Device  
MIB  
Management Information Base  
Acronyms-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Acronyms and Abbreviations  
Table 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations (Continued)  
Acronym Meaning  
MMF  
MSDP  
MUX  
NAK  
NC  
Multimode Fiber Optic Cable  
Multicast Source Discovery Protocol  
Multiplexer  
Negative Acknowledgment  
Normally Closed  
NCP  
NE  
Network Control Protocol  
Network Element  
NEBS  
NEC  
NI  
Network Equipment Building System  
National Electrical Code  
Network Interface  
NLPID  
NMS  
NO  
Network Layer Protocol Identifier  
Network Management System  
Normally Opened  
NOC  
NSA  
NSAP  
NSSA  
NTP  
Network Operations Center  
Nonservice Affecting  
Network Service Access Point  
Not-So-Stubby Area  
Network Time Protocol  
NUD  
NVT  
Neighbor Unreachability Detection  
Network Virtual Terminal  
Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning  
Open Database Connectivity  
Operating System  
OAM&P  
ODBC  
OS  
OSI  
Open Systems Interconnection  
Open Shortest Path First  
OSPF  
Acronyms-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Acronyms and Abbreviations  
Table 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations (Continued)  
Acronym Meaning  
OSS  
PAD  
PAP  
Operating Support System  
Packet Assembler Disassembler  
Password Authentication Protocol  
Private Branch eXchange  
Personal Computer  
PBX  
PC  
PDU  
PID  
Protocol Data Unit  
Private ID or password  
PMC  
POTS  
PPP  
PRI  
PCI Mezzanine Card  
Plain Old Telephone Service  
Point-to-Point Protocol  
Primary Rate Interface  
PROM  
PSI  
Programmable Read Only Memory  
Pounds per Square Inch  
Public Utility Commission  
Permanent Virtual Connection  
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation  
Quality of Service  
PUC  
PVC  
QAM  
QoS  
QPLC  
QTAM  
RAM  
RAM  
RAS  
RBOC  
RCV  
RD  
Quad Physical Layer Controller  
Queued Telecommunications Access Method (IBM)  
Random Access Memory  
Router Access Module  
Remote Access Server  
Regional Bell Operating Company  
Receiver  
Routing Domain  
Acronyms-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Acronyms and Abbreviations  
Table 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations (Continued)  
Acronym Meaning  
RDP  
REN  
RF  
Router Discovery Protocol  
Ringer Equivalence Number  
Radio Frequency  
RIP  
Routing Information Protocol  
Remote Network Monitoring Specification  
Read Only Memory  
RMON  
ROM  
RTS  
Request to Send  
RXD  
SAM  
SAP  
Receive Data  
Serial Alarm Module  
Service Advertisement Protocol  
Specialized Common Carrier  
Switching Center Control System  
SONET Circuit ID  
SCC  
SCCS  
SCID  
SDH  
SG  
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy  
Signal Ground  
SIC  
Secure Internal Communication  
System Identification number  
Stock Keeping Unit  
SID  
SKU  
SLC  
Smart Line Card  
SLIP  
SMF  
SMTP  
SNMP  
SNTP  
SONET  
Serial Line Interface Protocol  
Single Mode Fiber  
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol  
Simple Network Management Protocol  
Simple Network Time Protocol  
Synchronous Optical Network  
Acronyms-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Acronyms and Abbreviations  
Table 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations (Continued)  
Acronym Meaning  
SPF  
Shortest Path First  
Structured Query Language  
SQL  
STP  
Shielded Twisted Pair  
STP  
Spanning Tree Protocol  
SVC  
Switched Virtual Connection  
Terminal Access Controller Access System  
TID Address Resolution Protocol  
Telemetry Byte Oriented Serial  
Transmission Control Protocol  
TACACS  
TARP  
TBOS  
TCP  
TCP/IP  
Transmission Control Protocol over Internet Protocol  
TCP/UDP User Datagram Protocol  
TDM  
TDMA  
TELCO  
TFTP  
TID  
Time Division Multiplexing  
Time Division Multiple Access  
Telephone Company  
Trivial File Transfer Protocol  
Target Identifier  
TL1  
Transaction Language One  
Type of Service  
TOS  
TTL  
Time to Live  
TXD  
UA  
Transmit Data  
Unnumbered Acknowledgement  
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter  
User Datagram Protocol  
Underwriters Laboratories  
Universal Coordinated Time  
UART  
UDP  
UL  
UTC  
Acronyms-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Acronyms and Abbreviations  
Table 1 Acronyms and Abbreviations (Continued)  
Acronym Meaning  
UTP  
Unshielded Twisted Pair  
Virtual Channel  
VC  
VLAN  
VPN  
VRRP  
VT  
Virtual LAN  
Virtual Private Network  
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol  
Virtual Terminal  
WAN  
WINSLC  
XKMS  
XNS  
ZIP  
Wide Area Network  
Window to a Smart Line Card  
XML Key Management Specification  
Xerox Network Services  
Zone Information Protocol  
Acronyms-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

JBL Speaker SP225 9 User Manual
JBL Speaker System CS680 230V User Manual
Jenn Air Dishwasher JDB1100AWB User Manual
Jensen Clock Radio JCR 222 User Manual
JVC CRT Television AV28R250EK User Manual
JVC Security Camera H57U User Manual
JVC Stereo Receiver RX 5060S User Manual
Kenwood Car Video System KVT 627DVD User Manual
Kenwood DVD Player DVR 605 User Manual
KitchenAid Range YKGRT500 User Manual